{frametitle}{}. lyx The frame title is the text that follows on the line of the "BeginFrame" style. Beamer-Template/-Color/-Font frametitle Color/font parents: titlelike When the frame title and subtitle are to be typeset, this template is invoked with the beamercolor and -font frametitle set. This template is not invoked when the commands \frametitle or \framesubtitle are called. Rather, it is invoked when the whole frame has been completely read. Till then, the frame title and frame subtitle text are stored in a special place. This way, when the template is invoked, both inserts are setup correctly. The resulting TEX-box is then magically put back to the top of the frame. The following template options are predefined: · [default][ alignment ] The frame is typeset using the beamer-color frametitle and the beamer-font frametitle. The subtitle is put below using the color and font framesubtitle. If the color frametitle has a background, a background bar stretching the whole frame width is put behind the title. A background color of the subtitle is ignored. The alignment is passed on to the beamercolorbox environment. In particular, useful options are left, center, and right. As a special case, the right option causes the left border of the frame title to be somewhat larger than normal so that the frame title is more in the middle of the frame. · [shadow theme] This option is available if the outer theme shadow is loaded. It draws the frame title on top of a horizontal shading between the background colors of frametitle and frametitle right. A subtitle is, if present, also put on this bar. Below the bar, a "shadow" is drawn. · [sidebar theme] This option is available if the outer theme sidebar is loaded and if the headline height is not set to 0pt (which can be done using and option of the sidebar theme). With this option, the frame title is put inside a rectangular area that is part of the headline (some "negative space" is used to raise the frame title into this area). The background of the color frametitle is not used, this is the job of the headline template in this case. · [smoothbars theme] This option is available if the outer theme smoothbars is loaded. It typesets the frametitle on a colored bar with the background color of frametitle. The top and bottom of the bar smoothly blend over to backgrounds above and below. · [smoothtree theme] Like smoothbars theme, only for the smoothtree theme. The following commands are useful for this template: · \insertframetitle yields the frame title. · \insertframesubtitle yields the frame subtitle. \framesubtitle< overlay specification >{ frame subtitle text } If present, a subtitle will be shown in a smaller font below the main title. Like the \frametitle command, this command can be given anywhere in the frame, since the frame title is actually typeset only when everything else has already been typeset. Example:
\begin{frame} \frametitle{Frame Title Should Be in Uppercase.} \framesubtitle{Subtitles can be in lowercase if they are full sentences.} Frame contents. \end{frame}

article By default, the subtitle is not shown in any way in article mode.

59

Beamer-Color/-Font framesubtitle Color/font parents: frametitle This element provides a color and a font for the subtitle, but no template. It is the job of the frametitle template to also typeset the subtitle. Be default, all material for a slide is vertically centered. You can change this using the following class options: \documentclass[t]{beamer} Place text of slides at the (vertical) top of the slides. This corresponds to a vertical "flush." You can override this for individual frames using the c or b option. \documentclass[c]{beamer} Place text of slides at the (vertical) center of the slides. This is the default. You can override this for individual frames using the t or b option. 7.2.7 The Background

Each frame has a background, which--as the name suggests--is "behind everything." The background is a surprisingly complex ob ject: in beamer, it consists of a background canvas and the main background. The background canvas can be imagined as a large area on which everything (the main background and everything else) is painted on. By default, this canvas is a big rectangle filling the whole frame whose color is the background of the beamer-color background canvas. Since this color inherits from normal text, by changing the background color of the normal text, you can change this color of the canvas. Example: The following command changes the background color to a light red.
\setbeamercolor{normal text}{bg=red!20}

The canvas need not be monochrome. Instead, you can install a shading or even make it transparent. Making it transparent is a good idea if you wish to include your slides in some other document. Example: The following command makes the background canvas transparent:
\setbeamercolor{background canvas}{bg=}

Beamer-Template/-Color/-Font background canvas Color parents: normal text The template is inserted "behind everything." The template should typically be some TEX commands that produce a rectangle of height \paperheight and width \paperwidth. The following template options are predefined: · [default] installs a large rectangle with the background color. If the background is empty, the canvas is "transparent." Since background canvas inherits from normal text, you can change the background of the beamer-color normal text to change the color of the default canvas. However, to make the canvas transparent, only set the background of the canvas empty; leave the background of normal text white. · [vertical shading][ color options ] installs a vertically shaded background. Use with care: Background shadings are often distracting! The following color options may be given: top= color specifies the color at the top of the page. By default, 25% of the foreground of the beamer-color palette primary is used. bottom= color specifies the color at the bottom of the page. By default, the background of normal text at the moment of invocation of this command is used. middle= color specifies the color for the middle of the page. Thus, if this option is given, the shading changes from the bottom color to this color and then to the top color. midpoint= factor specifies at which point of the page the middle color is used. A factor of 0 is the bottom of the page, a factor of 1 is the top. The default, which is 0.5 is in the middle. The main background is drawn on top of the background canvas. It can be used to add, say, a grid to every frame or a big background picture or whatever. 60

Beamer-Template/-Color/-Font background Color parents: background canvas The template is inserted "behind everything, but on top of the background canvas." Use it for pictures or grids or anything that does not necessarily fill the whole background. When this template is typeset, the beamer-color and -font background will be setup. The following template options are predefined: · [default] is empty. · [grid][ grid options ] places a grid on the background. The following grid options may be given: step= dimension specifies the distance between grid lines. The default is 0.5cm. color= color specifies the color of the grid lines. The default is 10% foreground.

7.3

Margin Sizes

The "paper size" of a beamer presentation is fixed to 128mm times 96mm. The aspect ratio of this size is 4:3, which is exactly what most beamers offer these days. It is the job of the presentation program (like acroread or xpdf) to display the slides at full screen size. The main advantage of using a small "paper size" is that you can use all your normal fonts at their natural sizes. In particular, inserting a graphic with 11pt labels will result in reasonably sized labels during the presentation. You should refrain from changing the "paper size." However, you can change the size of the left and right margins, which default to 1cm. To change them, you should use the following command: \setbeamersize{ options } The following options can be given: · text margin left= TEX dimension sets a new left margin. This excludes the left sidebar. Thus, it is the distance between the right edge of the left sidebar and the left edge of the text. · text margin right= TEX dimension sets a new right margin. · sidebar width left= TEX dimension sets the size of the left sidebar. Currently, this command should be given before a shading is installed for the sidebar canvas. · sidebar width right= TEX dimension sets the size of the right sidebar. · description width= TEX dimension sets the default width of description labels, see Section 11.1. · description width of= text sets the default width of description labels to the width of the text , see Section 11.1. · mini frame size= TEX dimension sets the size of mini frames in a navigation bar. When two mini frame icons are shown alongside each other, their left end points are TEX dimension far apart. · mini frame offset= TEX dimension set an additional vertical offset that is added to the mini frame size when arranging mini frames vertically. article This command has no effect in article mode.

7.4

Restricting the Slides of a Frame
of slides in a frame is automatically calculated. If the largest number mentioned in any overlay inside the frame is 4, four slides are introduced (despite the fact that a specification like <4-> t that more than four slides would be possible). also specify the number of slides in the frame "by hand." To do so, you pass an overlay the \frame command. The frame will contain only the slides specified in this argument. following example.

The number specification might sugges You can specification Consider the

\begin{frame}<1-2,4-> This is slide number \only<1>{1}\only<2>{2}\only<3>{3}% \only<4>{4}\only<5>{5}. \end{frame}

61

This command will create a frame containing four slides. The first will contain the text "This is slide number 1," the second "This is slide number 2," the third "This is slide number 4," and the fourth "This is slide number 5." A useful specification is just <0>, which causes the frame to have to no slides at all. For example, \begin{frame} causes the frame to be suppressed in the handout version, but to be shown normally in all other versions. Another useful specification is , which causes the frame to be shown normally in beamer mode, but to be suppressed in all other versions.

62

8
8.1

Creating Overlays
The Pause Commands

The pause command offers an easy, but not very flexible way of creating frames that are uncovered piecewise. If you say \pause somewhere in a frame, only the text on the frame up to the \pause command is shown on the first slide. On the second slide, everything is shown up to the second \pause, and so forth. You can also use \pause inside environments; its effect will last after the environment. However, taking this to extremes and use \pause deeply within a nested environment may not have the desired result. A much more fine-grained control over what is shown on each slide can be attained using overlay specifications, see the next sections. However, for many simple cases the \pause command is sufficient. The effect of \pause lasts till the next \pause, \onslide, or the end of the frame.
\begin{frame} \begin{itemize} \item Shown from first slide on. \pause \item Shown from second slide on. \begin{itemize} \item Shown from second slide on. \pause \item Shown from third slide on. \end{itemize} \item Shown from third slide on. \pause \item Shown from fourth slide on. \end{itemize} Shown from fourth slide on. \begin{itemize} \onslide \item Shown from first slide on. \pause \item Shown from fifth slide on. \end{itemize} \end{frame}

\pause[ number ] This command causes the text following it to be shown only number is given, from the slide with the number number counter beamerpauses is set to this number. This command This command does not work inside amsmath environments things. Example:
\begin{frame} \begin{itemize} \item A \pause \item B \pause \item

from . If uses like

the next slide on, or, if the optional the optional number is given, the the \onslide command, internally. align, since these do really wicked

63

C \end{itemize} \end{frame}

article This command is ignored. lyx Use the "Pause" style with an empty line to insert a pause. To "unpause" some text, that is, to temporarily suspend pausing, use the command \onslide, see below.

8.2

The General Concept of Overlay Sp ecifications

The approach taken by most presentation classes to overlays is somewhat similar to the above \pause command. These commands get a certain slide number as input and affect the text on the slide following this command in a certain way. For example, prosper's \FromSlide{2} command causes all text following this command to be shown only from the second slide on. The beamer class uses a different approach (though the abovementioned command is also available: \onslide<2-> will have the same effect as \FromSlide{2}, except that \onslide transcends environments; likewise, \pause is internally mapped to a command with an appropriate overlay specifications). The idea is to add overlay specifications to certain commands. These specifications are always given in pointed brackets and follow the command "as soon as possible," though in certain cases beamer also allows overlay specification to be given a little later. In the simplest case, the specification contains just a number. A command with an overlay specification following it will only have "effect" on the slide(s) mentioned in the specification. What exactly "having an effect" means, depends on the command. Consider the following example.
\begin{frame} \textbf{This line is bold on all three slides.} \textbf<2>{This line is bold only on the second slide.} \textbf<3>{This line is bold only on the third slide.} \end{frame}

For the command \textbf, the overlay specification causes the text to be set in boldface only on the specified slides. On all other slides, the text is set in a normal font. For a second example, consider the following frame:
\begin{frame} \only<1>{This line is inserted only on slide 1.} \only<2>{This line is inserted only on slide 2.} \end{frame}

The command \only, which is introduced by beamer, normally simply inserts its parameter into the current frame. However, if an overlay-specification is present, it "throws away" its parameter on slides that are not mentioned. Overlay specifications can only be written behind certain commands, not every command. Which commands you can use and which effects this will have is explained in the next section. However, it is quite easy to redefine an existing command such that it becomes "overlay specification aware," see also Section 8.3. The syntax of (basic) overlay specifications is the following: They are comma-separated lists of slides and ranges. Ranges are specified like this: 2-5, which means slide two through to five. The start or the end of a range can be omitted. For example, 3- means "slides three, four, five, and so on" and -5 means the same as 1-5. A complicated example is -3,6-8,10,12-15, which selects the slides 1, 2, 3, 6, 7, 8, 10, 12, 13, 14, and 15. lyx Overlay specifications can also be given in LYX. You must give them in TEX-mode (otherwise the pointed brackets may be "escaped" by LYX, though this will not happen in all versions). For example, to add an overlay specification to an item, simply insert a TEX-mode text like <3> as the first thing in that item. Likewise, you can add an overlay specification to environments like theorem by giving them in TEX-mode right at the start of the environment.

64

8.3

Commands with Overlay Sp ecifications

For the following commands, adding an overlay specification causes the command to be simply ignored on slides that are not included in the specification: \textbf, \textit, \textsl, \textrm, \textsf, \color, \alert, \structure. If a command takes several arguments, like \color, the specification should directly follow the command as in the following example (but there are exceptions to this rule):
\begin{frame} \color<2-3>[rgb]{1,0,0} This text is red on slides 2 and 3, otherwise black. \end{frame}

For the following commands, the effect of an overlay specification is special: \onslide modifier < overlay specification >{ text } The behaviour of this command depends on whether the optional argument text is given or not (note that the optional argument is given in normal braces, not in square brackets). If present, the modifier can be either a + or a *. If no text is given, the following happens: All text following this command will only be shown (uncovered) on the specified slides. On non-specified slides, the text still occupies space. If no slides are specified, the following text is always shown. You need not call this command in the same TEX group, its effect transcends block groups. However, this command has a different effect inside an overprint environment, see the description of overprint. If the modifier is +, hidden text will not be treated as covered, but as invisible. The difference is the same as the difference between \uncover and \visible. The modifier * may not be given if no text argument is present. Example:
\begin{frame} Shown on first slide. \onslide<2-3> Shown on second and third slide. \begin{itemize} \item Still shown on the second and third slide. \onslide+<4-> \item Shown from slide 4 on. \end{itemize} Shown from slide 4 on. \onslide Shown on all slides. \end{frame}

If a text argument is present, \onslide (without a modifier ) is mapped to \uncover, \onslide+ is mapped to \visible, and \onslide* is mapped to \only. Example:
\begin{frame} \onslide<1>{Same effect as the following command.} \uncover<1>{Same effect as the previous command.} \onslide+<2>{Same effect as the following command.} \visible<2>{Same effect as the previous command.} \onslide*<3>{Same effect as the following command.} \only<3>{Same effect as the previous command.} \end{frame}

\only< overlay specification >{ text }< overlay specification > If either overlay specification is present (though only one may be present), the text is inserted only into the specified slides. For other slides, the text is simply thrown away. In particular, it occupies no space. 65

Example: \only<3->{Text inserted from slide 3 on.} Since the overlay specification may also be given after the text, you can often use \only to make other commands overlay-specification-aware in a simple manner: Example:
\newcommand{\myblue}{\only{\color{blue}}} \begin{frame} \myblue<2> This text is blue only on slide 2. \end{frame}

\uncover< overlay specification >{ text } If the overlay specification is present, the text is shown ("uncovered") only on the specified slides. On other slides, the text still occupies space and it is still typeset, but it is not shown or only shown as if transparent. For details on how to specify whether the text is invisible or just transparent see Section 16.6. Example: \uncover<3->{Text shown from slide 3 on.} article This command has the same effect as \only. \visible< overlay specification >{ text } This command does almost the same as \uncover. The only difference is that if the text is not shown, it is never shown in a transparent way, but rather it is not shown at all. Thus, for this command the transparency settings have no effect. Example: \visible<2->{Text shown from slide 2 on.} article This command has the same effect as \only. \invisible< overlay specification >{ text } This command is the opposite of \visible. Example: \invisible<-2>{Text shown from slide 3 on.} \alt< overlay specification >{ default text }{ alternative text }< overlay specification > Only one overlay specification may be given. The default text is shown on the specified slides, otherwise the alternative text. The specification must always be present. Example: \alt<2>{On Slide 2}{Not on slide 2.} Once more, giving the overlay specification at the end is useful when the command is used inside other commands. Example: Here is the definition of \uncover:
\newcommand{\uncover}{\alt{\@firstofone}{\makeinvisible}}

\temporal< overlay specification >{ before slide text }{ default text }{ after slide text } This command alternates between three different texts, depending on whether the current slide is temporally before the specified slides, is one of the specified slides, or comes after them. If the overlay specification is not an interval (that is, if it has a "hole"), the "hole" is considered to be part of the before slides. Example:
\temporal<3-4>{Shown on 1, 2}{Shown on 3, 4}{Shown 5, 6, 7, ...} \temporal<3,5>{Shown on 1, 2, 4}{Shown on 3, 5}{Shown 6, 7, 8, ...}

As a possible application of the \temporal command consider the following example: Example:
\def\colorize<#1>{% \temporal<#1>{\color{red!50}}{\color{black}}{\color{black!50}}} \begin{frame}

66

\begin{itemize} \colorize<1> \colorize<2> \colorize<3> \colorize<4> \end{itemize} \end{frame}

\item \item \item \item

First Second Third Fourth

item. item. item. item.

\item< alert specification >[ item label ]< alert specification > presen- Only one alert specification may be given. The effect of alert specification is described in Section 8.6.3. tation Example:
\begin{frame} \begin{itemize} \item<1-> First \item<2-> Second \item<2-> Third \item<3-> Fourth \end{itemize} \end{frame}

point, point, point, point,

shown o shown also sh shown

n all slides. on slide 2 and later. own on slide 2 and later. on slide 3.

\begin{frame} \begin{enumerate} \item<3-| alert@3>[0.] A zeroth point, shown at the very end. \item<1-| alert@1> The first and main point. \item<2-| alert@2> The second point. \end{enumerate} \end{frame}

article The action specification is currently completely ignored. lyx The action specification must be given in TEX-mode and it must be given at the very start of the item. The related command \bibitem is also overlay-specification-aware in the same way as \item. \label< overlay specification >{ label name } If the overlay specification is present, the label is only inserted on the specified slide. Inserting a label on more than one slide will cause a `multiple labels' warning. However, if no overlay specification is present, the specification is automatically set to just `1' and the label is thus inserted only on the first slide. This is typically the desired behaviour since it does not really matter on which slide the label is inserted, except if you use an \only command and except if you wish to use that label as a hyperjump target. Then you need to specify a slide. Labels can be used as target of hyperjumps. A convenient way of labelling a frame is to use the label= name option of the frame environment. However, this will cause the whole frame to be kept in memory till the end of the compilation, which may pose a problem. Example:
\begin{frame} \begin{align} a &= b + c c &= d + e \end{align}

\label{first}\\ % no specification needed \label{second}\\% no specification needed

Blah blah, \uncover<2>{more blah blah.} \only<3>{Specification is needed now.\label<3>{mylabel}} \end{frame}

67

8.4

Environments with Overlay Sp ecifications

Environments can also be equipped with overlay specifications. For most of the predefined environments, see Section 11.3, adding an overlay specification causes the whole environment to be uncovered only on the specified slides. This is useful for showing things incrementally as in the following example.
\begin{frame} \frametitle{A Theorem on Infinite Sets} \begin{theorem}<1-> There exists an infinite set. \end{theorem} \begin{proof}<3-> This follows from the axiom of infinity. \end{proof} \begin{example}<2-> The set of natural numbers is infinite. \end{example} \end{frame}

In the example, the first slide only contains the theorem, on the second slide an example is added, and on the third slide the proof is also shown. For each of the basic commands \only, \alt, \visible, \uncover, and \invisible there exists "environment versions" onlyenv, altenv, visibleenv, uncoverenv, and invisibleenv. Except for altenv and onlyenv, these environments do the same as the commands. \begin{onlyenv}< overlay specification > environment contents \end{onlyenv} If the overlay specification is given, the contents of the environment is inserted into the text only on the specified slides. The difference to \only is, that the text is actually typeset inside a box that is then thrown away, whereas \only immediately throws away its contents. If the text is not "typesettable," the onlyenv may produce an error where \only would not. Example:
\begin{frame} This line is always shown. \begin{onlyenv}<2> This line is inserted on slide 2. \end{onlyenv} \end{frame}

\begin{altenv}< overlay specification >{ begin text }{ end text }{ alternate begin text }{ alternate end text }< overlay specification > environment contents \end{altenv} Only one overlay specification may be given. On the specified slides, begin text will be inserted at the beginning of the environment and end text will be inserted at the end. On all other slides, alternate begin text and alternate end text will be used. Example:
\begin{frame} This \begin{altenv}<2>{(}{)}{[}{]} word \end{uncoverenv} is in round brackets on slide 2 and in square brackets on slide 1. \end{frame}

68

8.5

Dynamically Changing Text or Images

You may sometimes wish to have some part of a frame change dynamically from slide to slide. On each slide of the frame, something different should be shown inside this area. You could achieve the effect of dynamically changing text by giving a list of \only commands like this:
\only<1>{Initial text.} \only<2>{Replaced by this on second slide.} \only<3>{Replaced again by this on third slide.}

The trouble lines, which severe if the To solve flexible, but

with this approach is that may cause the whole frame replacement text is several this problem, you can use less user-friendly.

it may lead to slight, but annoying differences in the heights of the to "whobble" from slide to slide. This problem becomes much more lines long. two environments: overlayarea and overprint. The first is more

\begin{overlayarea}{ area width }{ area height } environment contents \end{overlayarea} Everything within the environment will be placed in a rectangular area of the specified size. The area will have the same size on all slides of a frame, regardless of its actual contents. Example:
\begin{overlayarea}{\textwidth}{3cm} \only<1>{Some text for the first slide.\\Possibly several lines long.} \only<2>{Replacement on the second slide.} \end{overlayarea}

lyx Use the style "OverlayArea" to insert an overlay area. \begin{overprint}[ area width ] environment contents \end{overprint} The area width defaults to the text width. Inside the environment, use \onslide commands to specify different things that should be shown for this environment on different slides. The \onslide commands are used like \item commands. Everything within the environment will be placed in a rectangular area of the specified width. The height and depth of the area are chosen large enough to accommodate the largest contents of the area. The overlay specifications of the \onslide commands must be disjoint. This may be a problem for handouts, since, there, all overlay specifications default to 1. If you use the option handout, you can disable all but one \onslide by setting the others to 0. Example:
\begin{overprint} \onslide<1| handout:1> Some text for the first slide.\\ Possibly several lines long. \onslide<2| handout:0> Replacement on the second slide. Supressed for handout. \end{overprint}

lyx Use the style "Overprint" to insert an overprint environment. You have to use TEX-mode to insert the \onslide commands. A similar need for dynamical changes arises when you have, say, a series of pictures named first.pdf, second.pdf, and third.pdf that show different stages of some process. To make a frame that shows these pictures on different slides, the following code might be used:
\begin{frame} \frametitle{The Three Process Stages} \includegraphics<1>{first.pdf} \includegraphics<2>{second.pdf} \includegraphics<3>{third.pdf} \end{frame}

69

The above code uses the fact the beamer makes the \includegraphics command overlay-specificationaware. It works nicely, but only if each .pdf file contains the complete graphic to be shown. However, some programs, like xfig, sometimes also produce series of graphics in which each file just contains the additional graphic elements to be shown on the next slide. In this case, the first graphic must be shown not on overlay 1, but from overlay 1 on, and so on. While this is easy to achieve by changing the overlay specification <1> to <1->, the graphics must also be shown on top of each other. An easy way to achieve this is to use TEX's \llap command like this:
\begin{frame} \frametitle{The Three Process Stages} \includegraphics<1->{first.pdf}% \llap{\includegraphics<2->{second.pdf}}% \llap{\includegraphics<3->{third.pdf}} \end{frame}

or like this:
\begin{frame} \frametitle{The Three Process Stages} \includegraphics{first.pdf}% \pause% \llap{\includegraphics{second.pdf}}% \pause% \llap{\includegraphics{third.pdf}} \end{frame}

A more convenient way is to use the \multiinclude command, see Section 13.1.3 for details.

8.6
8.6.1

Advanced Overlay Sp ecifications
Making Commands and Environments Overlay-Sp ecification-Aware

This section explains how to define new commands that are overlay-specification-aware. Also, it explains how to setup counters correctly that should be increased from frame to frame (like equation numbering), but not from slide to slide. You may wish to skip this section, unless you want to write your own extensions to the beamer class. A beamer extends the syntax of L TEX's standard command \newcommand: \newcommand<>{ command name }[ argument number ][ default optional value ]{ text } Declares the new command named command name . The text should contain the body of this command and it may contain occurrences of parameters like # number . Here number may be between 1 and argument number + 1. The additionally allowed argument is the overlay specification. When command name is used, it will scan as many as argument number arguments. While scanning them, it will look for an overlay specification, which may be given between any two arguments, before the first argument, or after the last argument. If it finds an overlay specification like <3>, it will call text with arguments 1 to argument number set to the normal arguments and the argument number argument number + 1 set to <3> (including the pointed brackets). If no overlay specification is found, the extra argument is empty. If the default optional value is provided, the first argument of command name is optional. If no optional argument is specified in square brackets, the default optional value is used. Example: The following command will typeset its argument in red on the specified slides:
\newcommand<>{\makered}[1]{{\color#2{red}#1}}

Example: Here is beamer's definition of \emph:
\newcommand<>{\emph}[1]{{\only#2{\itshape}#1}}

Example: Here is beamer's definition of \transdissolve (the command \beamer@dotrans mainly passes its argument to hyperref):
\newcommand<>{\transdissolve}[1][]{\only#2{\beamer@dotrans[#1]{Dissolve}}}

70

\renewcommand<>{ existing command name }[ argument number ][ default optional value ]{ text } Redeclares a command that already exists in the same way as \newcommand<>. Inside text , you can still access to original definitions using the command \beameroriginal, see the example. Example: This command is used in beamer to make \hyperlink overlay-specification-aware:
\renewcommand<>{\hyperlink}[2]{\only#3{\beameroriginal{\hyperlink}{#1}{#2}}}

\newenvironment<>{ environment name }[ argument number ][ default optional value ] { begin text }{ end text } Declares a new environment that is overlay-specification-aware. If this environment is encountered, the same algorithm as for \newcommand<> is used to parse the arguments and the overlay specification. Note that, as always, the end text may not contain any arguments like #1. In particular, you do not have access to the overlay specification. In this case, it is usually a good idea to use altenv environment in the begin text . Example: Declare your own action block:
\newenvironment<>{myboldblock}[1]{% \begin{actionenv}#2% \textbf{#1} \par} {\par% \end{actionenv}} \begin{frame} \begin{myboldblock}<2> This theorem is shown only on the second slide. \end{myboldblock} \end{frame}

Example: Text in the following environment is normally bold and italic on non-specified slides:
\newenvironment<>{boldornormal} {\begin{altenv}#1 {\begin{bfseries}}{\end{bfseries}} {}{}} {\end{altenv}}

Incidentally, since altenv also accepts its argument at the end, the same effect could have been achieved using just
\newenvironment{boldornormal} {\begin{altenv} {\begin{bfseries}}{\end{bfseries}} {}{}} {\end{altenv}}

\renewenvironment<>{ existing environment name }[ argument number ][ default optional value ] { begin text }{ end text } Redefines an existing environment. The original environment is still available under the name original existing environment name . Example:
\renewenvironment<>{verse} {\begin{actionenv}#1\begin{originalverse}} {\end{originalverse}\end{actionenv}}

The following two commands can be used to ensure that a certain counter is automatically reset on subsequent slides of a frame. This is necessary for example for the equation count. You might want this count to be increased from frame to frame, but certainly not from overlay slide to overlay slide. For equation counters and footnote counters (you should not use footnotes), these commands have already been invoked.

71

\resetcounteronoverlays{ counter name } After you have invoked this command, the value of the specified counter will be the same on all slides of every frame. Example: \resetcounteronoverlays{equation} \resetcountonoverlays{ count register name } The same as \resetcounteronoverlays, except that this command should be used with counts that A have been created using the TEX primitive \newcount instead of L TEX's \definecounter. Example:
\newcount\mycount \resetcountonoverlays{mycount}

8.6.2

Mo de Sp ecifications

This section is only important if you use beamer's mode mechanism to create different versions of your presentation. If you are not familiar with beamer's modes, please skip this section or read Section 20 first. In certain cases you may wish to have different overlay specifications to apply to a command in different modes. For example, you might wish a certain text to appear only from the third slide on during your presentation, but in a handout for the audience there should be no second slide and the text should appear already on the second slide. In this case you could write
\only<3| handout:2>{Some text}

The vertical bar, which must be followed by a (white) space, separates the two different specifications 3 and handout:2. By writing a mode name before a colon, you specify that the following specification only applies to that mode. If no mode is given, as in 3, the mode beamer is automatically added. For this reason, if you write \only<3>{Text} and you are in handout mode, the text will be shown on all slides since there is no restriction specified for handouts and since the 3 is the same as beamer:3. It is also possible to give an overlay specification that contains only a mode name (or several, separated by vertical bars):
\only

{This text is shown only in article mode.}

An overlay specification that does not contain any slide numbers is called a (pure) mode specification. If a mode specification is given, all modes that are not mentioned are automatically suppressed. Thus means "on all slides in beamer mode and also on all slides in all other modes, since nothing special is specified for them," whereas means "on all slides in beamer mode and not on any other slide." Mode specifications can also be used outside frames as in the following examples:
\section{This section exists only in the presentation modes} \section

{This section exists only in the article mode}

You can also mix pure mode specifications and overlay specifications, although this can get confusing:
\only{Riddle}

This will cause the text Riddle to be inserted in article mode and on the first slide of a frame in beamer mode, but not at all in handout or trans mode. (Try to find out how differs from and from .) As if all this were not already complicated enough, there is another mode that behaves in a special way: the mode second. For this mode a special rule applies: An overlay specification for mode beamer also applies to mode second (but not the other way round). Thus, if we are in mode second, the specification means "on slide 2" and also means "on slide 2". To get a slide that is typeset in beamer mode, but not in second mode, you can use, .

72

8.6.3

Action Sp ecifications

This section also introduces a rather advanced concept. You may also wish to skip it on first reading. Some overlay-specification-aware commands cannot only handle normal overlay specifications, but also so called action specifications. In an action specification, the list of slide numbers and ranges is prefixed by action @, where action is the name of a certain action to be taken on the specified slides:
\item<3-| alert@3> Shown from slide 3 on, alerted on slide 3.

In the above example, the \item command, which allows actions to be specified, will uncover the item text from slide three on and it will, additionally, alert this item exactly on slide 3. Not all commands can take an action specification. Currently, only \item (though not in article mode currently), \action, the environment actionenv, and the block environments (like block or theorem) handle them. By default, the following actions are available: · alert alters the item or block. · uncover uncovers the item or block (this is the default, if no action is specified). · only causes the whole item or block to be inserted only on the specified slides. · visible causes the text to become visible only on the specified slides (the difference between uncover and visible is the same as between \uncover and \visible). · invisible causes the text to become invisible on the specified slides. The rest of this section explains how you can add your own actions and make commands actionspecification-aware. You may wish to skip it upon first reading. You can easily add your own actions: An action specification like action @ slide numbers simply inserts an environment called action env around the \item or parameter of \action with < slide numbers > as overlay specification. Thus, by defining a new overlay-specification-aware environment named my action name env, you can add your own action:
\newenvironment{checkenv}{\only{\setbeamertemplate{itemize item}{X}}}{}

You can then write
\item Text.

This will change the itemization symbol before Text. to X on slide 2 in beamer mode. The definition of checkenv used the fact that \only also accepts an overlay-specification given after its argument. The whole action mechanism is base on the following environment: \begin{actionenv}< action specification > environment contents \end{actionenv} This environment extracts all actions from the action specification for the current mode. For each action of the form action @ slide numbers , it inserts the following text: \begin{ action env}< slide number > at the beginning of the environment and the text \end{ action env} at the end. If there are several action specifications, several environments are opened (and closed in the appropriate order). An overlay specification without an action is promoted to uncover@ overlay specification . If the so called default overlay specification is not empty, it will be used in case is given. The default overlay specification is usually just empty, but it may be s additional optional argument to the command \frame or to the environments description (see these for details). Also, the default action specification can b \beamerdefaultoverlayspecification, see below. Example:
\begin{frame} \begin{actionenv}<2-| alert@3-4,6> This text is shown the same way as the text below. \end{actionenv}

no action specification et either by providing an itemize, enumerate, or e set using the command

73

\begin{uncoverenv}<2-> \begin{alertenv}<3-4,6> This text is shown the same way as the text above. \end{alertenv} \end{uncoverenv} \end{frame}

\action< action specification >{ text } This has the same effect as putting text in an actionenv. Example: \action{Could also have used \alert<2>{}.} \beamerdefaultoverlayspecification{ default overlay specification } Locally sets the default overlay specification to the given value. This overlay specification will be used in every actionenv environment and every \item that does not have its own overlay specification. The main use of this command is to install an incremental overlay specification like <+-> or <+-| alert@+>, see Section 8.6.4. Usually, the default overlay specification is installed automatically by the optional arguments to \frame, frame, itemize, enumerate, and description. You will only have to use this command if you wish to do funny things. If given outside any frame, this command sets the default overlay specification for all following frames for which you do not override the default overlay specification. Example: \beamerdefaultoverlayspecification{<+->} Example: \beamerdefaultoverlayspecification{} clears the default overlay specification. (Actually, it installs the default overlay specification <*>, which just means "always," but the "portable" way of clearing the default overlay specification is this call.) 8.6.4 Incremental Sp ecifications

This section is mostly important for people who have already used overlay specifications a lot and have grown tired of writing things like <1->, <2->, <3->, and so on again and again. You should skip this section on first reading. Often you want to have overlay specifications that follow a pattern similar to the following:
\begin{itemize} \item<1-> Apple \item<2-> Peach \item<3-> Plum \item<4-> Orange \end{itemize}

The problem starts if you decide to insert a new fruit, say, at the beginning. In this case, you would have to adjust all of the overlay specifications. Also, if you add a \pause command before the itemize, you would also have to update the overlay specifications. beamer offers a special syntax to make creating lists as the one above more "robust." You can replace it by the following list of incremental overlay specifications :
\begin{itemize} \item<+-> Apple \item<+-> Peach \item<+-> Plum \item<+-> Orange \end{itemize}

The effect of the +-sign is the following: You can use it in any overlay specification at any point where you A would usually use a number. If a +-sign is encountered, it is replaced by the current value of the L TEX counter beamerpauses, which is 1 at the beginning of the frame. Then the counter is increased by 1, though it is only increased once for every overlay specification, even if the specification contains multiple +-signs (they are replaced by the same number).

74

In the above example, the first specification is replaced by <1->. Then the second is replaced by <2-> and so forth. We can now easily insert new entries, without having to change anything. We might also write the following:
\begin{itemize} \item<+-| alert@+> \item<+-| alert@+> \item<+-| alert@+> \item<+-| alert@+> \end{itemize} Apple Peach Plum Orange

This will alert the current item when it is uncovered. For example, the first specification <+-| alert@+> is replaced by <1-| alert@1>, the second is replaced by <2-| alert@2>, and so on. Since the itemize environment also allows you to specify a default overlay specification, see the documentation of that environment, the above example can be written even more economically as follows:
\begin{itemize}[<+-| alert@+>] \item Apple \item Peach \item Plum \item Orange \end{itemize}

The \pause command also updates the counter beamerpauses. You can change this counter yourself A using the normal L TEX commands \setcounter or \addtocounter. Any occurence of a +-sign may be followed by an offset in round brackets. This offset will be added to the value of beamerpauses. Thus, if beamerpauses is 2, then <+(1)-> expands to <3-> and <+(-1)-+> expands to <1-2>. There is another special sign you can use in an overlay specification that behaves similarly to the +-sign: a dot. When you write <.->, a similar thing as in <+-> happens except that the counter beamerpauses is not incremented and except that you get the value of beamerpauses decreased by one. Thus a dot, possibly followed by an offset, just expands to the current value of the counter beamerpauses minus one, possibly offset. This dot notation can be useful in case like the following:
\begin{itemize}[<+->] \item Apple \item<.-> Peach \item Plum \item Orange \end{itemize}

In the example, the second item is shown at the same time as the first one since it does not update the counter. In the following example, each time an item is uncovered, the specified text is alerted. When the next item is uncovered, this altering ends.
\begin{itemize}[<+->] \item This is \alert<.>{important}. \item We want to \alert<.>{highlight} this and \alert<.>{this}. \item What is the \alert<.>{matrix}? \end{itemize}

75

9

Structuring a Presentation: The Static Global Structure

This section lists the commands that are used for structuring a presentation "globally" using commands like \section or \part. These commands are use to create a static structure, meaning that the resulting presentation is normally presented one slide after the other in the order the slides occur. Section 10 explains which commands can be used to create the interactive structure. For the interactive structure, you must interact with the presentation program, typically by clicking on hyperlinks, to advance the presentation.

9.1

Adding a Title Page

You can use the \titlepage command to insert a title page into a frame. By default, it will arrange the following elements on the title page: the document title, the author(s)'s names, their affiliation, a title graphic, and a date. \titlepage Inserts the text of a title page into the current frame. Example: \frame{\titlepage} Example: \frame[plain]{\titlepage} for a titlepage that fills the whole frame. lyx If you use the "Title" style in your presentation, a title page is automatically inserted. Beamer-Template/-Color/-Font title page This template is invoked when the \titlepage command is used. The following template options are predefined: · [default][ alignment ] The title page is typeset showing the title, followed by the author, his or her affiliation, the date, and a titlegraphic. If any of these are missing, they are not shown. Except for the titlegraphic, if the beamer-color title, author, institute, or date is defined, respectively, it is used to as textcolor for these entries. If a background color is defined for them, a colored bar in the corresponding color is drawn behind them, spanning the text width. The corresponding beamer-fonts are used for these entries. The alignment option is passed on the beamercolorbox and can be used, for example, to flush the title page to the left by specifying left here. The following commands are useful for this template: · · · · · · \insertauthor inserts a version of the author's name that is useful for the title page. \insertdate inserts the date. \insertinstitute inserts the institute. \inserttitle inserts a version of the document title that is useful for the title page. \insertsubtitle inserts a version of the document title that is useful for the title page. \inserttitlegraphic inserts the title graphic into a template.

For compatibility with other classes, in article mode the following command is also provided: \maketitle presen- If used inside a frame, it has the same effect as \titlepage. If used outside a frame, it has the same tation effect as \frame{\titlepage}; in other words, a frame is added if necessary. Before you invoke the title page command, you must specify all elements you wish to be shown. This is done using the following commands: \title[ short title ]{ title } The short tile is used in headlines and footlines. Inside the title line breaks can be inserted using the double-backslash command. Example:
\title{The Beamer Class} \title[Short Version]{A Very Long Title\\Over Several Lines}

76

article The short form is ignored in article mode. \subtitle[ short subtitle ]{ subtitle } The subshort tile is not used by default, but is available via the insert \insertshortsubtitle. The subtitle is shown below the title in a smaller font. Example:
\title{The Beamer Class} \subtitle{An easily paced introduction with many examples.}

article This command causes the subtitle to be appended to the title with a linebreak and a \normalsize command issued before it. This may or may not be what you would like to happen. \author[ short author names ]{ author names } The names should be separated using the command \and. In case authors have different affiliations, they should be suffixed by the command \inst with different parameters. Example: \author[Hemaspaandra et al.]{L. Hemaspaandra\inst{1} \and T. Tantau\inst{2}} article The short form is ignored in article mode. \institute[ short institute ]{ institute } If more than one institute is given, they should be separated using the command \and and they should be prefixed by the command \inst with different parameters. Example:
\institute[Universities of Rochester and Berlin]{ \inst{1}Department of Computer Science\\ University of Rochester \and \inst{2}Fakult\"at f\"ur Elektrotechnik und Informatik\\ Technical University of Berlin}

article The short form is ignored in article mode. The long form is also ignored, except if the document class (like llncs) defines it. \date[ short date ]{ date } Example: \date{\today} or \date[STACS 2003]{STACS Conference, 2003}. article The short form is ignored in article mode. \titlegraphic{ text } The text is shown as title graphic. Typically, a picture environment is used as text . Example: \titlegraphic{\pgfuseimage{titlegraphic}} article The command is ignored in article mode. \subject{ text } Enters the text as the sub ject text in the pdf document info. It currently has no other effect. \keywords{ text } Enters the text as keywords in the pdf document info. It currently has no other effect. By default, the \title and \author commands will also insert their arguments into a resulting pdf-file in the document information fields. This may cause problems if you use complicated things like boxes as arguments to these commands. In this case, you might wish to switch off the automatic generation of these entries using the following class option: \documentclass[usepdftitle=false]{beamer} Suppresses the automatic generation of title and author entries in the pdf document information. 77

9.2

Adding Sections and Subsections

A You can structure your text using the commands \section and \subsection. Unlike standard L TEX, these commands will not create a heading at the position where you use them. Rather, they will add an entry to the table of contents and also to the navigation bars. In order to create a line break in the table of contents (usually not a good idea), you can use the command \breakhere. Note that the standard command \\ does not work (actually, I do not really know why; comments would be appreciated).

\section< mode specification >[ short section name ]{ section name } Starts a section. No heading is created. The section name is shown in the table of contents and in the navigation bars, except if short section name is specified. In this case, short section name is used in the navigation bars instead. If a mode specification is given, the command only has an effect for the specified modes. Example: \section[Summary]{Summary of Main Results} article The mode specification allows you to provide an alternate section command in article mode. This is necessary for example if the short section name is unsuitable for the table of contents: Example:
\section[Results]{Results on the Main Problem} \section

{Results on the Main Problem}

Beamer-Template/-Color/-Font section in toc This template is used when a section entry is to be typeset. For the permissible options see the parent template table of contents. The following commands are useful for this template: · \inserttocsection inserts the table of contents version of the current section name. · \inserttocsectionnumber inserts the number of the current section (in the table of contents). Beamer-Template/-Color/-Font section in toc shaded This template is used instead of the previous one if the section should be shown in a shaded way, because it is not the current section. For the permissible options see the parent template table of contents. \section< mode specification >*{ section name } Starts a section without an entry in the table of contents. No heading is created, but the section name is shown in the navigation bar. Example: \section*{Outline} Example: \section*{Outline} \subsection< mode specification >[ short subsection name ]{ subsection name } This command works the same way as the \section command. Example: \subsection[Applications]{Applications to the Reduction of Pollution} Beamer-Template/-Color/-Font subsection in toc Like section in toc, only for subsection. In addition to the inserts for the section in toc template, the following commands are available for this template: · \inserttocsubsection inserts the table of contents version of the current subsection name. · \inserttocsubsectionnumber inserts the number of the current subsection (in the table of contents). Beamer-Template/-Color/-Font subsection in toc shaded Like section in toc shaded, only for subsections.

78

\subsection< mode specification >*{ subsection name } Starts a subsection without an entry in the table of contents. No heading is created, but the subsection name is shown in the navigation bar, except if subsection name is empty. In this case, neither a table of contents entry nor a navigation bar entry is created, but any frames in this "empty" subsection are shown in the navigation bar. Example:
\section{Summary} \frame{This frame is not shown in the navigation bar} \subsection*{} \frame{This frame is shown in the navigation bar, but no subsection entry is shown.} \subsection*{A subsection} \frame{Normal frame, shown in navigation bar. The subsection name is also shown in the navigation bar, but not in the table of contents.}

\subsubsection< mode specification >[ short subsubsection name ]{ subsubsection name } This command works the like \subsection. However, subsubsections are supported less well than subsections. For example, in the table of contents subsubsections are always shown with the same shading/hiding parameters as the subsection. I strongly discourage the use of subsubsections in presentations. If you do not use them, you will give a better presentation. Example: \subsubsection[Applications]{Applications to the Reduction of Pollution} Beamer-Template/-Color/-Font subsubsection in toc Like subsection in toc, only for subsection. In addition to the inserts for the subsection in toc template, the following commands are available for this template: · \inserttocsubsubsection inserts the table of contents version of the current subsubsection name. · \inserttocsubsubsectionnumber inserts the number of the current subsubsection (in the table of contents). Beamer-Template/-Color/-Font subsubsection in toc shaded Like subsection in toc shaded, only for subsubsections. \subsection< mode specification >*{ subsubsection name } Starts a subsection without an entry in the table of contents. subsubsection name is shown in a possible sidebar. No heading is created, but the

Often, you may want a certain type of frame to be shown directly after a section or subsection starts. For example, you may wish every subsection to start with a frame showing the table of contents with the current subsection hilighted. To facilitate this, you can use the following commands. \AtBeginSection[ special star text ]{ text } The given text will be inserted at the beginning of every section. If the special star text parameter is specified, this text will be used for starred sections instead. Different calls of this command will not "add up" the given texts (like the \AtBeginDocument command does), but will overwrite any previous text. Example:
\AtBeginSection[] % Do nothing for \section* {

79

\begin{frame} \frametitle{Outline} \tableofcontents[currentsection] \end{frame} }

article This command has no effect in article mode. lyx You have to insert this command using a TEX-mode text. \AtBeginSubsection[ special star text ]{ text } The given text will be inserted at the beginning of every subsection. If the special star text parameter is specified, this text will be used for starred subsections instead. Different calls of this command will not "add up" the given texts. Example:
\AtBeginSubsection[] % Do nothing for \subsection* { \begin{frame} \frametitle{Outline} \tableofcontents[currentsection,currentsubsection] \end{frame} }

\AtBeginSubsubsection[ special star text ]{ text } Like \AtBeginSubsection, only for subsubsections.

9.3

Adding Parts

If you give a long talk (like a lecture), you may wish to break up your talk into several parts. Each such part acts like a little "talk of its own" with its own table of contents, its own navigation bars, and so on. Inside one part, the sections and subsections of the other parts are not shown at all. To create a new part, use the \part command. All sections and subsections following this command will be "local" to that part. Like the \section and \subsection command, the \part command does not cause any frame or special text to be produced. However, it is often advisable for the start of a new part to use the command \partpage to insert some text into a frame that "advertises" the beginning of a new part. See beamerexample3.tex for an example. \part< mode specification >[ short part name ]{ part name } Starts a part. The part name will be shown when the \partpage command is used. The shown part name is not shown anywhere by default, but it is accessible via the command \insertshortpart. Example:
\begin{document} \frame{\titlepage} \section*{Outlines} \subsection{Part I: Review of \frame{ \frametitle{Outline of Part \tableofcontents[part=1]} \subsection{Part II: Today's L \frame{ \frametitle{Outline of Part \tableofcontents[part=2]}

Previous Lecture} I} ecture} II}

\part{Review of Previous Lecture} \frame{\partpage} \section[Previous Lecture]{Summary of the Previous Lecture} \subsection{Topics} \frame{...} \subsection{Learning Objectives}

80

\frame{...} \part{Today's Lecture} \frame{\partpage} \section{Topic A} \frame{\tableofcontents[currentsection]} \subsection{Foo} \frame{...} \section{Topic B} \frame{\tableofcontents[currentsection]} \subsection{bar} \frame{...} \end{document}

\partpage Works like \titlepage, only that the current part, not the current presentation is "advertised." Example: \frame{\partpage} Beamer-Template/-Color/-Font part page This template is invoked when the \partpage command is used. The following template options are predefined: · [default][ alignment ] The part page is typeset showing the current part number and, below, the current part title. The beamer-color and -font part page are used, including the background color of part page. As for the title page template, the alignment option is passed on the beamercolorbox. The following commands are useful for this template: · \insertpart inserts the current part name. · \insertpartnumber inserts the current part number as an Arabic number into a template. · \insertpartromannumber inserts the current part number as a Roman number into a template. \AtBeginPart{ text } The given text will be inserted at the beginning of every part. Example:
\AtBeginPart{\frame{\partpage}}

9.4

Splitting a Course Into Lectures

When using beamer with the article mode, you may wish to have the lecture notes of a whole course reside in one file. In this case, only a few frames are actually part of any particular lecture. The \lecture command makes it easy to select only a certain set of frames from a file to be presented. This command takes (among other things) a label name. If you say \includeonlylecture with this label name, then only the frames following the corresponding \lecture command are shown. The frames following other \lecture commands are suppressed. By default, the \lecture command has no other effect. It does not create any frames or introduce entries in the table of contents. However, you can use \AtBeginLecture to have beamer insert, say, a title page at the beginning of (each) lecture. \lecture[ short lecture name ]{ lecture name }{ lecture label } Starts a lecture. The lecture name will be available via the \insertlecture command. The short lecture name is available via the \insertshortlecture command. Example:
\begin{document} \lecture{Vector Spaces}{week 1} \section{Introduction} ...

81

\section{Summary} \lecture{Scalar Products}{week 2} \section{Introduction} ... \section{Summary} \end{document}

article This command has no effect in article mode. \includeonlylecture lecture label Causes all \frame, frame, \section, \subsection, and \part commands following a \lecture command to be suppressed, except if the lecture's label matches the lecture label . Frames before any \lecture commands are always included. This command should be given in the preamble. Example: \includeonlylecture{week 1} article This command has no effect in article mode. \AtBeginLecture{ text } The given text will be inserted at the beginning of every lecture. Example:
\AtBeginLecture{\frame{\Large Today's Lecture: \insertlecture}}

article This command has no effect in article mode.

9.5

Adding a Table of Contents

A You can create a table of contents using the command \tableofcontents. Unlike the normal L TEX table of contents command, this command takes an optional parameter in square brackets that can be used to create certain special effects.

\tableofcontents[ comma-separated option list ] Inserts a table of contents into the current frame. Example:
\section*{Outline} \frame{\tableofcontents} \section{Introduction} \frame{\tableofcontents[currentsection]} \subsection{Why?} \frame{...} \frame{...} \subsection{Where?} \frame{...} \section{Results} \frame{\tableofcontents[currentsection]} \subsection{Because} \frame{...} \subsection{Here} \frame{...}

The following options can be given: · currentsection causes all sections but the current to be shown in a semi-transparent way. Also, all subsections but those in the current section are shown in the semi-transparent way. This command is a shorthand for specifying the following options:
sectionstyle=show/shaded,subsectionstyle=show/show/shaded

82

· currentsubsection causes all subsections but the current subsection in the current section to be shown in a semi-transparent way. This command is a shorthand for specifying the option subsectionstyle=show/shaded. · firstsection= section number specifies which section should be numbered as section "1." This is useful if you have a first section (like an overview section) that should not receive a number. Section numbers are not shown by default. To show them, you must install a different table of contents templates. · hideallsubsections causes all subsections to be hidden. This command is a shorthand for specifying the option subsectionstyle=hide. · hideothersubsections causes the subsections of sections other than the current one to be hidden. This command is a shorthand for specifying the option subsectionstyle=show/show/hide. · part= part number causes the table of contents of part part number to be shown, instead of the table of contents of the current part (which is the default). This option can be combined with the other options, although combining it with the current option obviously makes no sense. · pausesections causes a \pause command to be issued before each section. This is useful if you wish to show the table of contents in an incremental way. · pausesubsections causes a \pause command to be issued before each subsection. · sections={ overlay specification } causes only the sections mentioned in the overlay specification to be shown. For example, sections={<2-4| handout:0>} causes only the second, third, and fourth section to be shown in the normal version, nothing to be shown in the handout version, and everything to be shown in all other versions. For convenience, if you omit the pointed brackets, the specification is assumed to apply to all versions. Thus sections={2-4} causes sections two, three, and four to be shown in all versions. · sectionstyle= style for current section / style for other sections specifies how sections should be displayed. Allowed styles are show, shaded, and hide. The first will show the section title normally, the second will show it in a semi-transparent way, and the third will completely suppress it. You can also omit the second style, in which case the first is used for all sections (this is not really useful). · subsectionstyle= style for current subsection / style for other subsections in current section / style for subsections in other sections specifies how subsections should be displayed. The same styles as for the sectionstyle option may be given. You can omit the last style, in which case the second also applies to the last, and you can omit the last two, in which case the first applies to all. Example: subsectionstyle=shaded causes all subsections to be shaded. Example: subsectionstyle=hide causes all subsections to be hidden. Example: subsectionstyle=show/shaded causes all subsections but the current subsection in the current section to be shown in a semi-transparent way. Example: subsectionstyle=show/show/hide causes all subsections outside the current section to be suppressed. Example: subsectionstyle=show/shaded/hide causes all subsections outside the current section to be suppressed and only the current subsection in the current section to be hilighted. The last examples are useful if you do not wish to show too many details when presenting the talk outline. article The options are ignored in article mode. lyx You can give options to the \tableofcontents command by inserting a TEX-mode text with the options in square brackets directly after the table of contents. Parent Beamer-Template sections/subsections in toc This is a parent template, whose children are section in toc and subsection in toc. This means that if you use the \setbeamertemplate command on this template, the command is instead called for both of these children (with the same arguments). The following template options are predefined: 83

· [default] In the default setting, the sections and subsections are typeset using the fonts and colors section in toc and subsection in toc, though the background colors are ignored. The subsections are indented. · [sections numbered] Similar to the default setting, but the section numbers are also shown. The subsections are not numbered. · [subsections numbered] This time, the subsections are numbered, but not the sections. Nevertheless, since the subsections are "fully numbered" as in "1.2" or "3.2," if every section has at least one subsection, the section numbered will not really be missed. · [circle] Draws little circles before the sections. Inside the circles the section number is shown. The beamer-font and color section number projected is used for typesetting the circles, that is, the circle gets the background color and the text inside the circle the foreground color. · [square] Similar to the circle option, except that small squares are used instead of circles. Small, unnumbered squares are shown in front of the subsections. · [ball] Like square, the only difference being the balls are used instead of squares. · [ball unnumbered] Similar to ball, except that no numbering is used. This option makes the table of contents look more like an itemize. If none of the above options suits you, you have to change the templates section in toc and subsection in toc directly. Parent Beamer-Template sections/subsections in toc shaded A parent template with children section in toc shaded and subsection in toc shaded. They are used to render section and subsection entries when they are currently shaded; like all non-current subsections in \tableofcontents[currentsubsection]. The following template options are predefined: · [default][ opaqueness ] In the default setting, the templates section in toc shaded and subsection in toc shaded just show whatever the nonshaded versions of these templates show, but only opaqueness % opaque. The default is 20%. Example: \setbeamertemplate{table of contents shaded}[default][50] makes dimmed entries 50% transparent.

9.6

Adding a Bibliography

A You can use the bibliography environment and the \cite commands of L TEX in a beamer presentation. You will typically have to typeset your bibliography items partly "by hand." Nevertheless, you can use bibtex to create a "first approximation" of the bibliography. Copy the content of the file main.bbl into your presentation. If you are not familiar with bibtex, you may wish to consult its documentation. It is a powerful tool for creating high-quality citations. Using bibtex or your editor, place your bibliographic references in the environment thebibliography. A This (standard L TEX) environment takes one parameter, which should be the longest \bibitem label in the following list of bibliographic entries.

\begin{thebibliography}{ longest label text } environment contents \end{thebibliography} Inserts a bibliography into the current frame. The longest label text is used to determine the indentation of the list. However, several predefined options for the typesetting of the bibliography ignore this parameter since they replace the references by a symbol.
A Inside the environment, use a (standard L TEX) \bibitem command for each reference item. Inside A each item, use a (standard L TEX) \newblock command to separate the authors's names, the title, the book/journal reference, and any notes. Each of these commands may introduce a new line or color or other formatting, as specified by the template for bibliographies.

The environment must be placed inside a frame. If the bibliography does not fit on one frame, you should split it (create a new frame and a second thebibliography environment) or use the allowframebreaks option. Even better, you should reconsider whether it is a good idea to present so many references.

84

Example:
\begin{frame} \frametitle{For Further Reading} \begin{thebibliography}{Dijkstra, 1982} \bibitem[Solomaa, 1973]{Solomaa1973} A.~Salomaa. \newblock {\em Formal Languages}. \newblock Academic Press, 1973. \bibitem[Dijkstra, 1982]{Dijkstra1982} E.~Dijkstra. \newblock Smoothsort, an alternative for sorting in situ. \newblock {\em Science of Computer Programming}, 1(3):223--233, 1982. \end{thebibliography} \end{frame}

Four templates govern the appearance of the author, title, journal, and note text. These author templates are inserted before the first block of the entry (the first block is all text before the first occurrence of a \newblock command). The title template is inserted before the second block (the text between the first and second occurrence of \newblock). Likewise for the journal and note templates. The templates are inserted before the blocks and you do not have access to the blocks themselves via insert commands. The corresponding beamer-color and -font are also installed before the blocks. Beamer-Template/-Color/-Font bibliography entry author This template is inserted before the author of a bibliography entry. The color and font are also installed. Note that the effect of this template will persist until the end of the bibliography item or until one of the following templates undo the effect. By default, this template does nothing. The default color is the structure color. Beamer-Template/-Color/-Font bibliography entry title This template is inserted before the title of a bibliography entry (more precisely, it is inserted after the first occurrence of the \newblock command). By default, this template starts a new paragraph, causing a line break. The default color is the normal text color. Beamer-Template/-Color/-Font bibliography entry journal This template is inserted before the journal of a bibliography entry (the second \newblock). By default, this template starts a new paragraph. The default color is a slightly transparent version of the structure color. Beamer-Template/-Color/-Font bibliography entry note This template is inserted before any note text at the end of a bibliography entry (it is inserted before the third \newblock). By default, this template starts a new paragraph. The default color is the same as for the journal. \bibitem< overlay specification >[ citation text ]{ label name } The citation text is inserted into the text when the item is cited using \cite{ label name } in the main presentation text. For a beamer presentation, this should usually be as long as possible. Use \newblock commands to separate the authors's names, the title, the book/journal reference, and any notes. If the overlay specification is present, the entry will only be shown on the specified slides. Example:
\bibitem[Dijkstra, 1982]{Dijkstra1982} E.~Dijkstra. \newblock Smoothsort, an alternative for sorting in situ. \newblock {\em Science of Computer Programming}, 1(3):223--233, 1982.

Beamer-Template/-Color/-Font bibliography item Color/font parents: item

85

A This template is used to render the bibliography item. Unlike normal L TEX, the default template for the bibliography does not repeat the citation text (like "[Dijkstra, 1982]") before each item in the bibliography. Instead, a cute, small article symbol is drawn. The rationale is that the audience will not be able to remember any abbreviated citation texts till the end of the talk. The following template options are predefined:

· [default] Draws a cute little article icon as the reference. Use this for journal articles, parts of books (like conference proceedings), or technical reports. · [article] Alias for the default. · [book] Draws a cute little book icon as the reference. Use this for, well, books. · [triangle] Draws a triangle as the reference. This is more in keeping with the standard itemize items. · [text] Uses the reference text (like "[Dijkstra, 1982]") as the reference text. Be sure you what you are doing if you use this. The following insert is useful for the template: · \insertbiblabel inserts the current citation label.

9.7

Adding an App endix

You can add an appendix to your talk by using the \appendix command. You should put frames and perhaps whole subsections into the appendix that you do not intend to show during your presentation, but which might be useful to answer a question. The \appendix command essentially just starts a new part named \appendixname. However, it also sets up certain hyperlinks. Like other parts, the appendix is kept separate of your actual talk. \appendix< mode specification > Starts the appendix in the specified modes. All frames, all \subsection commands, and all \section commands used after this command will not be shown as part of the normal navigation bars. Example:
\begin{document} \frame{\titlepage} \section*{Outline} \frame{\tableofcontents} \section{Main Text} \frame{Some text} \section*{Summary} \frame{Summary text} \appendix \section{\appendixname} \frame{\tableofcontents} \subsection{Additional material} \frame{Details} \frame{Text omitted in main talk.} \subsection{Even more additional material} \frame{More details} \end{document}

86

10
10.1

Structuring a Presentation: The Interactive Global Structure
Adding Hyp erlinks and Buttons

To create anticipated nonlinear jumps in your talk structure, you can add hyperlinks to your presentation. A hyperlink is a text (usually rendered as a button) that, when you click on it, jumps the presentation to some other slide. Creating such a button is a three-step process: 1. You specify a target using the command \hypertarget or (easier) the command \label. In some cases, see below, this step may be skipped. 2. You render the button using \beamerbutton or a similar command. This will render the button, but clicking it will not yet have any effect. 3. You put the button inside a \hyperlink command. Now clicking it will jump to the target of the link. \hypertarget< overlay specification >{ target name }{ text } If the overlay specification is present, the text is the target for hyper jumps to target name only on the specified slide. On all other slides, the text is shown normally. Note that you must add an overlay specification to the \hypertarget command whenever you use it on frames that have multiple slides (otherwise pdflatex rightfully complains that you have defined the same target on different slides). Example:
\begin{frame} \begin{itemize} \item<1-> First item. \item<2-> Second item. \item<3-> Third item. \end{itemize} \hyperlink{jumptosecond}{\beamergotobutton{Jump to second slide}} \hypertarget<2>{jumptosecond}{} \end{frame}

article You must say \usepackage{hyperref} in your preamble to use this command in article mode. The \label command creates a hypertarget as a side-effect and the label= name option of the \frame command creates a label named name < slide number > for each slide of the frame as a side-effect. Thus the above example could be written more easily as:
\begin{frame}[label=threeitems] \begin{itemize} \item<1-> First item. \item<2-> Second item. \item<3-> Third item. \end{itemize} \hyperlink{threeitems<2>}{\beamergotobutton{Jump to second slide}} \end{frame}

The following commands can be used to specify in an abstract way what a button will be used for. \beamerbutton{ button text } Draws a button with the given button text . Example: \hyperlink{somewhere}{\beamerbutton{Go somewhere}} article This command (and the following) just insert their argument in article mode. Beamer-Template/-Color/-Font button When the \beamerbutton command is called, this template is used to render the button. Inside the template you can use the command \insertbuttontext to insert the argument that was passed to \beamerbutton. The following template options are predefined: 87

· [default] Typesets the button with rounded corners. The fore- and background of the beamer-color button are used and also the beamer-font button. The border of the button gets the foreground of the beamer-color button border. The following inserts are useful for this element: · \insertbuttontext inserts the text of the current button. Inside "Goto-Buttons" (see below) this text is prefixed by the insert \insertgotosymbol and similarly for skip and return buttons. · \insertgotosymbol This text is inserted at the beginning of goto buttons. Redefine this command to change the symbol. Example: \renewcommand{\insertgotosymbol}{\somearrowcommand} · \insertskipsymbol This text is inserted at the beginning of skip buttons. · \insertreturnsymbol This text is inserted at the beginning of return buttons. Beamer-Color button border The foreground of this color is used to render the border of buttons. \beamergotobutton{ button text } Draws a button with the given button text . Before the text, a small symbol (usually a right-pointing arrow) is inserted that indicates that pressing this button will jump to another "area" of the presentation. Example: \hyperlink{detour}{\beamergotobutton{Go to detour}} \beamerskipbutton{ button text } The symbol drawn for this button is usually a double right arrow. Use this button if pressing it will skip over a well-defined part of your talk. Example:
\frame{ \begin{theorem} ... \end{theorem} \begin{overprint} \onslide<1> \hfill\hyperlinkframestartnext{\beamerskipbutton{Skip proof}} \onslide<2> \begin{proof} ... \end{proof} \end{overprint} }

\beamerreturnbutton{ button text } The symbol drawn for this button is usually a left-pointing arrow. Use this button if pressing it will return from a detour. Example:
\frame<1>[label=mytheorem] { \begin{theorem} ... \end{theorem} \begin{overprint} \onslide<1> \hfill\hyperlink{mytheorem<2>}{\beamergotobutton{Go to proof details}} \onslide<2> \begin{proof} ... \end{proof} \hfill\hyperlink{mytheorem<1>}{\beamerreturnbutton{Return}}

88

\end{overprint} } \appendix \againframe<2>{mytheorem}

To make a button "clickable" you must place it in a command like \hyperlink. The command \hyperlink is a standard command of the hyperref package. The beamer class defines a whole bunch of other hyperlink commands that you can also use. \hyperlink< overlay specification >{ target name }{ link text }< overlay specification > Only one overlay specification may be given. The link text is typeset in the usual way. If you click anywhere on this text, you will jump to the slide on which the \hypertarget command was used with the parameter target name . If an overlay specification is present, the hyperlink (including the link text ) is completely suppressed on the non-specified slides. The following commands have a predefined target; otherwise they behave exactly like \hyperlink. In particular, they all also accept an overlay specification and they also accept it at the end, rather than at the beginning. \hyperlinkslideprev< overlay specification >{ link text } Clicking the text jumps one slide back. \hyperlinkslidenext< overlay specification >{ link text } Clicking the text jumps one slide forward. \hyperlinkframestart< overlay specification >{ link text } Clicking the text jumps to the first slide of the current frame. \hyperlinkframeend< overlay specification >{ link text } Clicking the text jumps to the last slide of the current frame. \hyperlinkframestartnext< overlay specification >{ link text } Clicking the text jumps to the first slide of the next frame. \hyperlinkframeendprev< overlay specification >{ link text } Clicking the text jumps to the last slide of the previous frame. The previous four command exist also with "frame" replaced by "subsection" everywhere, and also again with "frame" replaced by "section". \hyperlinkpresentationstart< overlay specification >{ link text } Clicking the text jumps to the first slide of the presentation. \hyperlinkpresentationend< overlay specification >{ link text } Clicking the text jumps to the last slide of the presentation. This excludes the appendix. \hyperlinkappendixstart< overlay specification >{ link text } Clicking the text jumps to the first slide of the appendix. If there is no appendix, this will jump to the last slide of the document. \hyperlinkappendixend< overlay specification >{ link text } Clicking the text jumps to the last slide of the appendix. \hyperlinkdocumentstart< overlay specification >{ link text } Clicking the text jumps to the first slide of the presentation. \hyperlinkdocumentend< overlay specification >{ link text } Clicking the text jumps to the last slide of the presentation or, if an appendix is present, to the last slide of the appendix. 89

10.2

Rep eating a Frame at a Later Point

Sometimes you may wish some slides of a frame to be shown in your main talk, but wish some "supplementary" slides of the frame to be shown only in the the appendix. In this case, the \againframe commands is useful. \againframe< overlay specification >[< default overlay specification >][ options ]{ name } presen- Resumes a frame that was previously created using \frame with the option label= name . You must tation have used this option, just placing a label inside a frame "by hand" is not enough. You can use this command to "continue" a frame that has been interrupted by another frame. The effect of this command is to call the \frame command with the given overlay specification , default overlay specification (if present), and options (if present) and with the original frame's contents. Example:
\frame<1-2>[label=myframe] { \begin{itemize} \item First subject. \item Second subject. \item Third subject. \end{itemize} } \frame { Some stuff explaining more on the second matter. } \againframe<3>{myframe}

The effect of the above code is to create four slides. In the first two, the items 1 and 2 are hilighted. The third slide contains the text "Some stuff explaining more on the second matter." The fourth slide is identical to the first two slides, except that the third point is now hilighted. Example:
\frame<1>[label=Cantor] { \frametitle{Main Theorem} \begin{Theorem} $\alpha < 2^\alpha$ for all ordinals~$\alpha$. \end{Theorem} \begin{overprint} \onslide<1> \hyperlink{Cantor<2>}{\beamergotobutton{Proof details}} \onslide<2-> % this is only shown in the appendix, where this frame is resumed. \begin{proof} As shown by Cantor, ... \end{proof} \hfill\hyperlink{Cantor<1>}{\beamerreturnbutton{Return}} \end{overprint} } ... \appendix \againframe<2>{Cantor}

In this example, the proof details are deferred to a slide in the appendix. Hyperlinks are setup, so that one can jump to the proof and go back. 90

article This command is ignored in article mode. lyx Use the style "AgainFrame" to insert an \againframe command. The label name is the text on following the style name and is not put in TEX-mode. However, an overlay specification must be given in TEX-mode and it must precede the label name.

10.3

Adding Anticipated Zo oming

Anticipated zooming is necessary when you have a very complicated graphic that you are not willing to simplify since, indeed, all the complex details merit an explanation. In this case, use the command \framezoom. It allows you to specify that clicking on a certain area of a frame should zoom out this area. You can then explain the details. Clicking on the zoomed out picture will take you back to the original one. \framezoom< button overlay specification >< zoomed overlay specification >[ options ] ( upper left x , upper left y )( zoom area width , zoom area depth ) This command should be given somewhere at the beginning of a frame. When given, two different things will happen, depending on whether the button overlay specification applies to the current slide of the frame or whether the zoomed overlay specification applies. These overlay specifications should not overlap. If the button overlay specification applies, a clickable area is created inside the frame. The size of this area is given by zoom area width and zoom area depth , which are two normal TEX dimensions (like 1cm or 20pt). The upper left corner of this area is given by upper left x and upper left y , which are also TEX dimensions. They are measures relative to the place where the first normal text of a frame would go. Thus, the location (0pt,0pt) is at the beginning of the normal text (which excludes the headline and also the frame title). By default, the button is clickable, but it will not be indicated in any special way. You can draw a border around the button by using the following option : · border= width in pixels will draw a border around the specified button area. The default width is 1 pixel. The color of this button is the linkbordercolor of hyperref. beamer sets this color to a 50% gray by default. To change this, you can use the command \hypersetup{linkbordercolor={ red green blue }}, where red , green , and blue are values between 0 and 1. When you press the button created in this way, the viewer application will hyperjump to the first of the frames specified by the zoomed overlay specification . For the slides to which this overlay specification applies, the following happens: The exact same area as the one specified before is "zoomed out" to fill the whole normal text area of the frame. Everything else, including the sidebars, the headlines and footlines, and even the frame title retain their normal size. The zooming is performed in such a way that the whole specified area is completely shown. The aspect ratio is kept correct and the zoomed area will possibly show more than just the specified area if the aspect ratio of this area and the aspect ratio of the available text area do not agree. Behind the whole text area (which contains the zoomed area) a big invisible "Back" button is put. Thus clicking anywhere on the text area will jump back to the original (unzoomed) picture. You can specify several zoom areas for a single frame. In this case, you should specify different zoomed overlay specification , but you can specify the same button overlay specification . You cannot nest zoomings in the sense that you cannot have a zoom button on a slide that is in some zoomed overlay specification . However, you can have overlapping and even nested button overlay specification . When clicking on an area that belongs to several buttons, the one given last will "win" (it should hence be the smallest one). If you do not wish to have the frame title shown on a zoomed slide, you can add an overlay specification to the \frametitle command that simply suppresses the title for the slide. Also, by using the plain option, you can have the zoomed slide fill the whole page. Example: A simple case
\begin{frame} \frametitle{A Complicated Picture}

91

\framezoom<1><2>(0cm,0cm)(2cm,1.5cm) \framezoom<1><3>(1cm,3cm)(2cm,1.5cm) \framezoom<1><4>(3cm,2cm)(3cm,2cm) \pgfimage[height=8cm]{complicatedimagefilename} \end{frame}

Example: A more complicate case in which the zoomed parts completely fill the frames.
\begin{frame}<1>[label=zooms] \frametitle<1>{A Complicated Picture} \framezoom<1><2>[border](0cm,0cm)(2cm,1.5cm) \framezoom<1><3>[border](1cm,3cm)(2cm,1.5cm) \framezoom<1><4>[border](3cm,2cm)(3cm,2cm) \pgfimage[height=8cm]{complicatedimagefilename} \end{frame} \againframe<2->[plain]{zooms}

92

11

Structuring a Presentation: The Lo cal Structure

A L TEX provides different commands for structuring text "locally," for example, via the itemize environment. These environments are also available in the beamer class, although their appearance has been slightly changed. Furthermore, the beamer class also defines some new commands and environments, see below, that may help you to structure your text.

11.1

Itemizations, Enumerations, and Descriptions

There are three predefined environments for creating lists, namely enumerate, itemize, and description. The first two can be nested to depth three, but nesting them to this depth creates totally unreadable slides. The \item command is overlay-specification-aware. If an overlay specification is provided, the item will only be shown on the specified slides, see the following example. If the \item command is to take an optional argument and an overlay specification, the overlay specification can either come first as in \item<1>[Cat] or come last as in \item[Cat]<1>.
\begin{frame} There are three important points: \begin{enumerate} \item<1-> A first one, \item<2-> a second one with a bunch \begin{itemize} \item first subpoint. (Only shown \item<3-> second subpoint added on \item<4-> third subpoint added on \end{itemize} \item<5-> and a third one. \end{enumerate} \end{frame}

of subpoints, from second slide on!). third slide. fourth slide.

\begin{itemize}[< default overlay specification >] environment contents \end{itemize} Used to display a list of items that do not have a special ordering. Inside the environment, use an \item command for each topic. If the optional parameter default overlay specification is given, in every occurrence of an \item command that does not have an overlay specification attached to it, the default overlay specification is used. By setting this specification to be an incremental overlay specification, see Section 8.6.4, you can implement, for example, a step-wise uncovering of the items. The default overlay specification is inherited by subenvironments. Naturally, in a subenvironment you can reset it locally by setting it to <1->. Example:
\begin{itemize} \item This is important. \item This is also important. \end{itemize}

Example:
\begin{itemize}[<+->] \item This is shown from \item This is shown from \item This is shown from \item<1-> This is shown \item This is shown from \end{itemize} the the the from the first secon third the f fourt slide on. d slide on. slide on. irst slide on. h slide on.

Example:
\begin{itemize}[<+-| alert@+>] \item This is shown from the first slide on and alerted on the first slide. \item This is shown from the second slide on and alerted on the second slide.

93

\item This is shown from the third slide on and alerted on the third slide. \end{itemize}

Example:
\newenvironment{mystepwiseitemize}{\begin{itemize}[<+-| alert@+>]}{\end{itemize}}

lyx Unfortunately, currently you cannot specify optional arguments with the itemize environment. You can, however, use the command \beamerdefaultoverlayspecification before the environment to get the desired effect. The appearance of an itemize list is governed by several templates. The first template concerns the way the little marker introducing each item is typeset: Parent Beamer-Template itemize items This template is a parent template, whose children are itemize item, itemize subitem, and itemize subsubitem. This means that if you use the \setbeamertemplate command on this template, the command is instead called for all of these children (with the same arguments). The following template options are predefined: · [default] The default item marker is a small triangle colored with the foreground of the beamer-color itemize item (or, for subitems, itemize subitem etc.). Note that these colors will automatically change under certain circumstances such as inside an example block or inside an alertenv environment. · [triangle] Alias for the default. · [circle] Uses little circles (or dots) as item markers. · [square] Uses little squares as item markers. · [ball] Uses little balls as item markers. Beamer-Template/-Color/-Font itemize item Color/font parents: item This template (with item instead of items) governs how the marker in front of a first-level item is typeset. "First-level" refers to the level of nesting. See the itemize items template for the options that may be given. When the template is inserted, the beamer-font and -color itemize item is installed. Typically, the font is ignored by the template as some special symbol is drawn anyway, by the font may be important if an optional argument is given to the \item command as in \item[First]. The font and color inherit from the item font and color, which are explained at the end of this section. Beamer-Template/-Color/-Font itemize subitem Color/font parents: subitem Like itemize item, only for second-level items. An item of an itemize inside an enumerate counts a second-level item. Beamer-Template/-Color/-Font itemize subsubitem Color/font parents: subsubitem Like itemize item, only for third-level items. \begin{enumerate}[< default overlay specification >][ mini template ] environment contents \end{enumerate} Used to display a list of items that are ordered. Inside the environment, use an \item command for each topic. By default, before each item increasing Arabic numbers followed by a dot are printed (as in "1." and "2."). This can be changed by specifying a different template, see below. The first optional argument default overlay specification has exactly the same effect as for the itemize environment. It is "detected" by the opening <-sign in the default overlay specification . Thus, if there is only one optional argument and if this argument does not start with <, then it is considered to be a mini template .

94

The syntax of the mini template is the same as the syntax of mini templates in the enumerate package (you do not need to include the enumerate package, this is done automatically). Roughly spoken, the text of the mini template is printed before each item, but any occurrence of a 1 in the mini template is replaced by the current item number, an occurrence of the letter A is replaced by the ith letter of the alphabet (in uppercase) for the ith item, and the letters a, i, and I are replaced by the corresponding lowercase letters, lowercase Roman letters, and uppercase Roman letters, respectively. So the mini template (i) would yield the items (i), (ii), (iii), (iv), and so on. The mini template A.) would yield the items A.), B.), C.), D.) and so on. For more details on the possible mini templates, see the documentation of the enumerate package. Note that there is also a template that governs the appearance of the mini template. Example:
\begin{enumerate} \item This is important. \item This is also important. \end{enumerate} \begin{enumerate}[(i)] \item First Roman point. \item Second Roman point. \end{enumerate} \begin{enumerate}[<+->][(i)] \item First Roman point. \item Second Roman point, uncovered on second slide. \end{enumerate}

article To use the mini template , you have to include the package enumerate. lyx The same constraints as for itemize apply. Parent Beamer-Template enumerate items Similar to itemize items, this template is a parent template, whose children are enumerate item, enumerate subitem, enumerate subsubitem, and enumerate mini template. These templates govern how the text (the number) of an enumeration is typeset. The following template options are predefined: · [default] The default enumeration marker uses the scheme 1., 2., 3. for the first level, 1.1, 1.2, 1.3 for the second level and 1.1.1, 1.1.2, 1.1.3 for the third level. · [circle] Places the numbers inside little circles. The colors are taken from item projected or subitem projected or subsubitem projected. · [square] Places the numbers on little squares. · [ball] "Pro jects" the numbers onto little balls. Beamer-Template/-Color/-Font enumerate item This template governs how the number in front of a first-level item is typeset. The level here refers to the level of enumeration nesting only. Thus an enumerate inside an itemize is a first-level enumerate (but it uses the second-level itemize/enumerate body). When the template is inserted, the beamer-font and -color enumerate item are installed. The following command is useful for this template: · \insertenumlabel inserts the current number of the top-level enumeration (as an Arabic number). This insert is also available in the next two templates. Beamer-Template/-Color/-Font enumerate subitem Like enumerate item, only for second-level items. · \insertsubenumlabel inserts the current number of the second-level enumeration (as an Arabic number). Example:
\setbeamertemplate{enumerate subitem}{\insertenumlabel-\insertsubenumlabel}

95

Beamer-Template/-Color/-Font enumerate subsubitem Like enumerate item, only for third-level items. · \insertsubsubenumlabel inserts the current number of the second-level enumeration (as an Arabic number). Beamer-Template/-Color/-Font enumerate mini template This template is used to typeset the number that arises from a mini template. · \insertenumlabel inserts the current number rendered by this mini template. For example, if the mini template is (i) and this command is used in the fourth item, \insertenumlabel would yield (iv). The following templates govern how the body of an itemize or an enumerate is typeset. Beamer-Template itemize/enumerate body begin This template is inserted at the beginning of a first-level itemize or enumerate environment. Furthermore, before this template is inserted, the beamer-font and -color itemize/enumerate body is used. Beamer-Template itemize/enumerate body end This template is inserted at the end of a first-level itemize or enumerate environment. There exist corresponding templates like itemize/enumerate subbody being from second- and third-level itemize or enumerates. Parent Beamer-Template items This template is a parent template of itemize items and enumerate items. Example: \setbeamertemplate{items}[circle] will cause all items in itemize or enumerate environments to become circles (of the appropriate size, color, and font). \begin{description}[< default overlay specification >][ long text ] environment contents \end{description} Like itemize, but used to display a list that explains or defines labels. The width of long text is used to set the indentation. Normally, you choose the widest label in the description and copy it here. If you do not give this argument, the default width is used, which can be changed using \setbeamersize with the argument description width= width . As for enumerate, the default overlay specification is detected by an opening <. The effect is the same as for enumerate and itemize. Example:
\begin{description} \item[Lion] King of the savanna. \item[Tiger] King of the jungle. \end{description} \begin{description}[longest label] \item<1->[short] Some text. \item<2->[longest label] Some text. \item<3->[long label] Some text. \end{description}

Example: The following has the same effect as the previous example:
\begin{description}[<+->][longest label] \item[short] Some text. \item[longest label] Some text. \item[long label] Some text. \end{description}

96

lyx Since you cannot specify the optional argument in LYX, if you wish to specify the width, you may wish to use the following command shortly before the environment: \setbeamersize{description width of={{ text }}} Example:
\setbeamersize{description width of={longest label}} \begin{description} \item<1->[short] Some text. \item<2->[longest label] Some text. \item<3->[long label] Some text. \end{description}

Beamer-Template/-Color/-Font description item This template is used to typeset the description items. When this template is called, the beamerfont and -color description item are installed. The following template options are predefined: · [default] By default, the description item text is just inserted without any modification. The main insert that is useful inside this template is: · \insertdescriptionitem inserts the text of the current description item. In order to simplify changing the color or font of items, the different kinds of items inherit form or just use the following "general" beamer-color and fonts: Beamer-Color/-Font item Color parents: local structure Font parents: structure This color/font serves as a parent for the individual items of itemize and enumerate environments, but also for items in the table of contents. Since its color parent is the local structure, a change of that color causes the color of items to change accordingly. Beamer-Color/-Font item projected Color/font parents: item This is a special "version" of the item color and font that should be used by templates that render items with text (as in an enumeration) and which to "pro ject" this text onto something like a ball or a square or whatever. While the normal item color typically has a transparent background, the item projected typically has a colored background and, say, a white foreground. Beamer-Color/-Font subitem Color/font parents: item Same as item for subitems, that is, for items on the second level of indentation. Beamer-Color/-Font subitem projected Color/font parents: item projected Same as item projected for subitems, that is, for items on the second level of indentation. Beamer-Color/-Font subsubitem Color/font parents: subitem Beamer-Color/-Font subsubitem projected Color/font parents: subitem projected

97

11.2

Hilighting

The beamer class predefines commands and environments for hilighting text. Using these commands makes is easy to change the appearance of a document by changing the theme. \structure< overlay specification >{ text } The given text is marked as part of the structure, that is, it is supposed to help the audience see the structure of your presentation. If the overlay specification is present, the command only has an effect on the specified slides. Example: \structure{Paragraph Heading.} Internally, this command just puts the text inside a structureenv environment. article Structure text is typeset as bold text. This can be changed by modifying the templates. lyx You need to use TEX-mode to insert this command. Beamer-Color/-Font structure This color/font is used when structured text is typeset, but it is also widely used as a base for many other colors including the headings of blocks, item buttons, and titles. In most color themes, the colors for navigational elements in the headline or the footline are derived from the foreground color of structure. By changing the structure color you can easily change the "basic color" of your presentation, other than the color of normal text. See also the related color local structure and the related font tiny structure. Inside the \structure command, the background of the color is ignored, but this is not necessarily true for elements that inherit their color from structure. There is no template structure, use structure begin and structure end instead. Beamer-Color local structure This color should be used to typeset structural elements that change their color according to the "local environment." For example, the color of an item "button" in an itemize environment changes its color according to circumstances. If it is used inside an example block, it should have the example text color; if it is currently "alerted" it should have the alerted text color. This color will setup by certain environments to have the color that should be used to typset things like item buttons. Since the color used for items, item, inherits from this color by default, items automatically change their color according to the current situation. If you write your own environment in which the item buttons are similar structural elements should have a different color, you should change the color local structure inside these environments. Beamer-Font tiny structure This special font is used for "tiny" structural text. Basically, this font should be used whenever a structural element uses a tiny font. The idea is that the tiny versions of the structure font often are not suitable. For example, it is often necessary to use a boldface version for them. Also, one might wish to have serif smallcaps structural text, but still retain normal sans-serif tiny structural text. \begin{structureenv}< overlay specification > environment contents \end{structureenv} Environment version of the \structure command. Beamer-Template structure begin This text is inserted at the beginning of a structureenv environment. The following template options are predefined: · [default] article The text is typeset in boldface. Beamer-Template structure end This text is inserted at the end of a structureenv environment. 98

\alert< overlay specification >{ hilighted text } The given text is hilighted, typically by coloring the text red. If the overlay specification is present, the command only has an effect on the specified slides. Example: This is \alert{important}. Internally, this command just puts the hilighted text inside an alertenv. article Alerted text is typeset as emphasized text. This can be changed by modifying the templates, see below. lyx You need to use TEX-mode to insert this command (which is not very convenient). Beamer-Color/-Font alerted text This color/font is used when alerted text is typeset. The background is currently ignored. There is no template alerted text, rather there are templates alerted text begin and alerted text end that are inserted before and after alerted text. \begin{alertenv}< overlay specification > environment contents \end{alertenv} Environment version of the \alert command. Beamer-Template alerted text begin This text is inserted at the beginning of a an alertenv environment. The following template options are predefined: · [default] presen- This changes the color local structure to alerted text. This causes things like buttons or tation items to be colored in the same color as the alerted text, which is often visually pleasing. See also the \structure command. article The text is emphasized. Beamer-Template alerted text end This text is inserted at the end of an alertenv environment.

11.3

Blo ck Environments

The beamer class predefines an environment for typesetting a "block" of text that has a heading. The appearance of blocks can easily be changed using the following template: Parent Beamer-Template blocks Changining this parent template changes the templates of normal blocks, alerted blocks, and example blocks. Example: \setbeamertemplate{blocks}[default] Example: \setbeamertemplate{blocks}[rounded][shadow=true] The following template options are predefined: · [default] The default setting typesets the block title on its own line. If a background is specified either for the block title or for the block body, this background color is used as background of the title or body, respectively. For alerted and example blocks, the corresponding beamer-colors and -fonts are used, instead. · [rounded][ shadow=true ] Makes the blocks "rounded." This means that the corners of the backgrounds of the blocks are "rounded off." If the shadow=true option is given, a "shadow" is drawn behind the block. \begin{block}< action specification >{ block title }< action specification > environment contents

99

\end{block} Only one action specification may be given. Inserts a block, like a definition or a theorem, with the title block title . If the action specification is present, the given actions are taken on the specified slides, see Section 8.6.3. In the example, the definition is shown only from slide 3 onward. Example:
\begin{block}<3->{Definition} A \alert{set} consists of elements. \end{block}

article The block name is typeset in bold. lyx The argument of the block must (currently) be given in TEX-mode. More precisely, there must be an opening brace in TEX-mode and a closing brace in TEX-mode around it. The text in between can also be typeset using LYX. I hope to get rid of this some day. Beamer-Template block begin This template is inserted at the beginning of a block before the environment contents . Inside this template, the block title can be accessed via the following insert: · \insertblocktitle Inserts the block title into the template. When the template starts, no special color or font is installed (for somewhat complicated reasons). Thus, this template should install the correct colors and fonts for the title and the body itself. Beamer-Template block end This template is inserted at the end of a block. Beamer-Color/-Font block title This beamer-color/-font should be used to typeset the title of the block. Since neither the color nor the font are setup automatically, the template block begin must do so itself. The default block template and also the rounded version honor the background of this color. Beamer-Color/-Font block body This beamer-color/-font should be used to typeset the body of the block, that is, the environment contents . As for block title, the color and font must be setup by the template block begin. \begin{alertblock}< action specification >{ block title }< action specification > environment contents \end{alertblock} Inserts a block whose title is hilighted. Behaves like the block environment otherwise. Example:
\begin{alertblock}{Wrong Theorem} $1=2$. \end{alertblock}

article The block name is typeset in bold and is emphasized. lyx Same applies as for block. Beamer-Template block alerted begin Same applies as for normal blocks. Beamer-Template block alerted end Same applies as for normal blocks. Beamer-Color/-Font block title alerted Same applies as for normal blocks. Beamer-Color/-Font block body alerted Same applies as for normal blocks. 100

\begin{exampleblock}< action specification >{ block title }< overlay specification > environment contents \end{exampleblock} Inserts a block that is supposed to be an example. Behaves like the block environment otherwise. Example: In the following example, the block is completely suppressed on the first slide (it does not even occupy any space).
\begin{exampleblock}{Example} The set $\{1,2,3,5\}$ has four elements. \end{exampleblock}

article The block name is typeset in italics. lyx Same applies as for block. Beamer-Template block example begin Same applies as for normal blocks. Beamer-Template block example end Same applies as for normal blocks. Beamer-Color/-Font block title example Same applies as for normal blocks. Beamer-Color/-Font block body example Same applies as for normal blocks. lyx Overlay specifications must be given right at the beginning of the environments and in TEX-mode.

11.4

Theorem Environments

The beamer class predefines several environments, like theorem or definition or proof, that you can use to typeset things like, well, theorems, definitions, or proofs. The complete list is the following: theorem, corollary, definition, definitions, fact, example, and examples. The following German block environments are also predefined: Problem, Loesung, Definition, Satz, Beweis, Folgerung, Lemma, Fakt, Beispiel, and Beispiele. Here is a typical example on how to use them:
\begin{frame} \frametitle{A Theorem on Infinite Sets} \begin{theorem}<1-> There exists an infinite set. \end{theorem} \begin{proof}<2-> This follows from the axiom of infinity. \end{proof} \begin{example}<3->[Natural Numbers] The set of natural numbers is infinite. \end{example} \end{frame}

In the following, only the English versions are discussed. The German ones behave analogously. \begin{theorem}< action specification >[ additional text ]< action specification > environment contents

101

\end{theorem} Inserts a theorem. Only one action specification may be given. If present, the additional text is shown behind the word "Theorem" in rounded brackets (although this can be changed by the template). The appearance of the theorem is governed by the templates theorem begin and theorem end, see their description later on for details on how to change these. Every theorem is put into a block environment, thus the templates for blocks also apply. The theorem style (a concept from amsthm) used for this environment is plain. In this style, the body of a theorem should be typeset in italics. The head of the theorem should be typeset in a bold font, but this is usually overruled by the templates. If the option envcountsect is given either as class option in one of the presentation modes or as an option to the package beamerarticle in article mode, then the numbering of the theorems is local to each section with the section number prefixing the theorem number; otherwise they are numbered consecutively throughout the presentation or article. I recommend using this option in article mode. By default, no theorem numbers are shown in the presentation modes. Example:
\begin{theorem}[Kummer, 1992] If $\#^_A^n$ is $n$-enumerable, then $A$ is recursive. \end{theorem} \begin{theorem}<2->[Tantau, 2002] If $\#_A^2$ is $2$-fa-enumerable, then $A$ is regular. \end{theorem}

lyx If present, the optional argument and the action specification must be given in TEX-mode at the beginning of the environment. The environments corollary, fact, and lemma behave exactly the same way. \documentclass[envcountsect]{beamer} Causes theorems, definitions, and so on to be numbered locally to each section. Thus, the first theorem of the second section would be Theorem 2.1 (assuming that there are no definitions, lemmas, or corollaries earlier in the section). \begin{definition}< action specification >[ additional text ]< action specification > environment contents \end{definition} Behaves like the theorem environment, except that the theorem style definition is used. In this style, the body of a theorem is typeset in an upright font. The environment definitions behaves exactly the same way. \begin{example}< action specification >[ additional text ]< action specification > environment contents \end{example} Behaves like the theorem environment, except that the theorem style example is used. A side-effect of using this theorem style is that the environment contents is put in an exampleblock instead of a block. The environment examples behaves exactly the same way. presen- The default template for typesetting theorems suppresses the theorem number, tation able" for typesetting (which it is by default in all predefined environments; environment using \newtheorem* no number will be available). article In article mode, theorems are automatically numbered. By specifying the theorems will be numbered locally to each section, which is usually a good articles. \begin{proof}< action specification >[ proof name ]< action specification > 102

even if this number is "availbut if you define your own class option envcountsect, idea, except for very short

environment contents \end{proof} Typesets a proof. If the optional proof name is given, it completely replaces the word "Proof." This is different from normal theorems, where the optional argument is shown in brackets. At the end of the theorem, a \qed symbol is shown, except if you say \qedhere earlier in the proof (this is exactly as in amsthm). The default \qed symbol is an open rectangle. To completely suppress the symbol, write \def\qedsymbol{} in your preamble. To get an closed rectangle, say
\setbeamertemplate{qed symbol}{\vrule width1.5ex height1.5ex depth0pt}

If you use babel and a different language, the text "Proof " is replaced by whatever is appropriate in the selected language. Example:
\begin{proof}<2->[Sketch of proof] Suppose ... \end{proof}

Beamer-Template/-Color/-Font qed symbol The symbol is shown at the end of every proof. You can define new environments using the following command: \newtheorem*{ environment name }[ numbered same as ]{ head text }[ number within ] This command is used exactly the same way as in the amsthm package (as a matter of fact, it is the command from that package), see its documentation. The only difference is that environments declared using this command are overlay-specification-aware in beamer and that, when typeset, are typeset according to beamer's templates. article Environments declared using this command are also overlay-specification-aware in article mode. Example: \newtheorem{observation}[theorem]{Observation} You can also default template If you wish to subsection), you use amsthm's command \newtheoremstyle to define new theorem styles. Note that the for theorems will ignore any head font setting, but will honor the body font setting. define the environments like theorem differently (for example, have it numbered within each can use the following class option to disable the definition of the predefined environments:

\documentclass[notheorems]{beamer} Switches off the definition of default blocks like theorem, but still loads amsthm and makes theorems overlay-specificiation-aware. The option is also available as a package option for beamerarticle and has the same effect. article In the article version, the package amsthm sometimes clashes with the document class. In this case you can use the following option, which is once more available as a class option for beamer and as a package option for beamerarticle, to switch off the loading of amsthm altogether. \documentclass[noamsthm]{beamer} Does not load amsthm and also not amsmath. Environments like theorem or proof will not be available. Parent Beamer-Template theorems This template is a parent of theorem begin and theorem end, see the first for a detailed discussion of how the theorem templates are set. Example: \setbeamertemplate{theorems}[numbered] The following template options are predefined: · [default] By default, theorems are typeset as follows: The font specification for the body is honored, the font specification for the head is ignored. No theorem number is printed. · [normal font] Like the default, except all font specifications for the body are ignored. Thus, the fonts are used that are normally used for blocks. 103

· [numbered] This option is like the default, except that the theorem number is printed for environments that are numbered. · [ams style] This causes theorems to be put in a block or exampleblock, but to be otherwise typeset as is normally done in amsthm. Thus the head font and body font depend on the setting for the theorem to be typeset and theorems are numbered. Beamer-Template theorem begin Whenever an environment declared using the command \newtheorem is to be typeset, this template is inserted at the beginning and the template theorem end at the end. If there is a overlay specification when an environment like theorem is used, this overlay specification will directly follow the block beginning template upon invocation. This is even true if there was an optional argument to the theorem environment. This optional argument is available via the insert \inserttheoremaddition. Numerous inserts are available in this template, see below. Before the template starts, the font is set to the body font prescribed by the environment to be typeset. Example: The following typesets theorems like amsthm:
\setbeamertemplate{theorem begin} {% \begin{\inserttheoremblockenv} {% \inserttheoremheadfont \inserttheoremname \inserttheoremnumber \ifx\inserttheoremaddition\@empty\else\ (\inserttheoremaddition)\fi% \inserttheorempunctuation }% } \setbeamertemplate{theorem end}{\end{\inserttheoremblockenv}}

Example: In the following example, all font "suggestions" for the environment are suppressed or ignored; and the theorem number is suppressed.
\setbeamertemplate{theorem begin} {% \normalfont% ignore body font \begin{\inserttheoremblockenv} {% \inserttheoremname \ifx\inserttheoremaddition\@empty\else\ (\inserttheoremaddition)\fi% }% } \setbeamertemplate{theorem end}{\end{\inserttheoremblockenv}}

The following inserts are available inside this template: · \inserttheoremblockenv This will normally expand to block, but if a theorem that has theorem style example is typeset, it will expand to exampleblock. Thus you can use this insert to decide which environment should be used when typesetting the theorem. · \inserttheoremheadfont This will expand to a font changing command that switches to the font to be used in the head of the theorem. By not inserting it, you can ignore the head font. · \inserttheoremname This will expand to the name of the environment to be typeset (like "Theorem" or "Corollary"). · \inserttheoremnumber This will expand to the number of the current theorem preceeded by a space or to nothing, if the current theorem does not have a number. · \inserttheoremaddition This will expand to the optional argument given to the environment or will be empty, if there was no optional argument. · \inserttheorempunctuation This will expand to the punctuation character for the current environment. This is usually a period. Beamer-Template theorem end Inserted at the end of a theorem. 104

11.5

Framed and Boxed Text

A In order to draw a frame (a rectangle) around some text, you can use L TEXs standard command \fbox and A also \frame (inside a beamer frame, the \frame command changes its meaning to the normal L TEX \frame command). More frame types are offered by the package fancybox, which defines the following commands: A \shadowbox, \doublebox, \ovalbox, and \Ovalbox. Please consult the L TEX Companion for details on how to use these commands. The beamer class also defines two environments for creating coloured boxes.

\begin{beamercolorbox}[ options ]{ beamer color } environment contents \end{beamercolorbox} This environment can be used to conveniently typeset some text using some beamer-color. Basically, the following two command blocks do the same:
\begin{beamercolorbox}{beamer color} Text \end{beamercolorbox} { \usebeamercolor{beamer color} \colorbox{bg}{ \color{fg} Text } }

In other words, the environment installs the beamer color and uses the background for the background of the box and the foreground for the text inside the box. However, in reality, numerous options can be given to specify in much greater detail how the box is rendered. If the background color of beamer color is empty, no background is drawn behind the text, that is, the background is "transparent." This command is used extensively by the default inner and outer themes for typesetting the headlines and footlines. It is not really intended to be used in normal frames (for example, it is not available inside article mode). You should prefer using structuring elements like blocks or theorems that automatically insert colored boxes as needed. Example: The following example could be used to typeset a headline with two lines, the first showing the document title, the second showing the author's name:
\begin{beamercolorbox}[ht=2.5ex,dp=1ex,center]{title in head/foot} \usebeamerfont{title in head/foot} \insertshorttitle \end{beamercolorbox}% \begin{beamercolorbox}[ht=2.5ex,dp=1ex,center]{author in head/foot} \usebeamerfont{author in head/foot} \insertshortauthor \end{beamercolorbox}

Example: Typesetting a postit:
\setbeamercolor{postit}{fg=black,bg=yellow} \begin{beamercolorbox}[sep=1em,wd=5cm]{postit} Place me somewhere! \end{beamercolorbox}

The following options can be given: · wd={ width } sets the width of the box. This command has two effects: First, TEX's \hsize is set to width . Second, after the box has been typeset, its width is set to width (no matter what it actually turned out to be). Since setting the \hsize does not automatically change some of A L TEX's linewidth dimensions, you should consider using a minipage inside this environment if you fool around with the width. If the width is larger than the normal text width, as specified by the value of \textwidth, the width of the resulting box is reset to the width \textwidth, but intelligent negative skips are 105

inserted at the left and right end of the box. The net effect of this is that you can use a width larger than the text width for a box and can insert the resulting box directly into normal text without getting annoying warnings and having the box positioned sensibly. · dp={ depth } sets the depth of the box, overriding the real depth of the box. The box is first typeset normally, then the depth is changed afterwards. This option is useful for creating boxes that have guaranteed size. If the option is not given, the box has its "natural" depth, which results from the typesetting. For example, a box containing only the letter "a" will have a different depth from a box containing only the letter "g." · ht= height sets the height of the box, overriding the real height. Note that the "height" does not include the depth (see, for example, the TEX-book for details). If you want a one-line box that always has the same size, setting the height to 2.25ex and the depth to 1ex is usually a good option. · left causes the text inside the box to be typeset left-aligned and with a (radically) ragged right border. This is the default. To get a better ragged right border, use the rightskip option. · right causes the text to be right-aligned with a (radically) ragged left border. · center centers the text inside the box. · leftskip= left skip installs the left skip inside the box as the left skip. TEX's left skip is a glue that is inserted at the left end of every line. See the TEX-book for details. · rightskip= right skip install the right skip . To get a good ragged right border, try, say, \rightskip=0pt plus 4em. · sep= dimension sets the size of extra space around the text. This space is added "inside the box," which means that if you specify a sep of 1cm and insert the box normally into the vertical list, then the left border of the box will be aligned with the left border of the slide text, while the left border of the text inside the box will be 1cm to the right of this left border. Likewise, the text inside the box will stop 1cm before the right border of the normal text. · colsep= dimension sets the extra "color separation space" around the text. This space behaves the same way as the space added by sep, only this space is only inserted if the box has a colored background, that is, if the background of the beamer color is not empty. This command can be used together with sep, the effects accumulate. · colsep*= dimension sets an extra color separation space around the text that is horizontal ly outside the box. This means that if the box has a background, this background will protrude by dimension to the left and right of the text, but this protruding background will not be taken intro consideration by TEX for typesetting purposes. A typical example usage of this option arises when you insert a box with a coloured background in the middle of normal text. In this case, if the background color is set, you would like a background to be drawn behind the text and you would like a certain extra space around this text (the background should not stop immediately at the borders of the text, this looks silly) and you would like the normal text always to be at the same horizontal position, independently of whether a background is present or not. In this case, using colsep*=4pt is a good option. · shadow= true or false draws a shadow behind the box. Currently, this option only has an effect if used together with the rounded option, but that may change. · rounded= true or false causes the borders of the box to be rounded off if there is a background installed. This command internally calls beamerboxesrounded. · ignorebg causes the background color of the beamer color to be ignored, that is, to be treated as if it were set to "transparent" or "empty." · vmode causes TEX to be in vertical mode when the box starts. Normally, mode at the start of the box (a \leavevmode is inserted automatically at unless this option is given). Only TEXperts need this option, so, if you know what you are doing anyway. \begin{beamerboxesrounded}[ options ]{ head } environment contents TEX will be in horizontal the beginning of the box use it, you will probably

106

\end{beamerboxesrounded} The text inside the environment is framed by a rectangular area with rounded corners. For the large rectangular area, the beamer-color specified with the lower option is used. Its background is used for the background, its foreground for the foreground. If the head is not empty, head is drawn in the upper part of the box using the beamer-color specified with the upper option for the fore- and background. The following options can be given: · lower= beamer color sets the beamer-color to be used for the lower (main) part of the box. Its background is used for the background, its foreground for the foreground of the main part of the box. If either is empty, the current background or foreground is used. The box will never be transparent. · upper= beamer color sets the beamer-color used for the upper (head) part of the box. It is only used if the head is not empty. · width= dimension causes the width of the text inside the box to be the specified dimension . By default, the \textwidth is used. Note that the box will protrude 4pt to the left and right. · shadow= true or false . If set to true, a shadow will be drawn. If no head is given, the head part is completely suppressed. Example:
\begin{beamerboxesrounded}[upper=block head,lower=block body,shadow=true]{Theorem} $A = B$. \end{beamerboxesrounded}

article This environment is not available in article mode.

11.6

Figures and Tables

A You can use the standard L TEX environments figure and table much the same way you would normally use them. However, any placement specification will be ignored. Figures and tables are immediately inserted where the environments start. If there are too many of them to fit on the frame, you must manually split them among additional frames or use the allowframebreaks option. Example:

\begin{frame} \begin{figure} \pgfuseimage{myfigure} \caption{This caption is placed below the figure.} \end{figure} \begin{figure} \caption{This caption is placed above the figure.} \pgfuseimage{myotherfigure} \end{figure} \end{frame}

Beamer-Template/-Color/-Font caption This template is used to render the caption. The following template options are predefined: · [default] typesets the caption name (a word like "Figure" or "Abbildung" or "Table," depending on whether a table or figure is typeset and depending on the currently installed language) before the caption text. No number is printed, since these make little sense in a normal presentation. · [numbered] adds the figure or table number to the caption. Use this option only if your audience has a printed handout or printed lecture notes that follow the same numbering. · [caption name own line] As the name suggests, this options puts the caption name (like "Figure") on its own line. Inside the template, you can use the following inserts:

107

· \insertcaption Inserts the text of the current caption. · \insertcaptionname Inserts the name of the current caption. This word is either "Table" or "Figure" or, if the babel package is used, some translation thereof. · \insertcaptionnumber Inserts the number of the current figure or table. Beamer-Color/-Font caption name These beamer-color and -font are used to typeset the caption name (a word like "Figure"). The caption template must directly "use" them, they are not installed automatically by the \insertcaptionname command.

11.7

Splitting a Frame into Multiple Columns

The beamer class offers several commands and environments for splitting (perhaps only part of ) a frame A into multiple columns. These commands have nothing to do with L TEX's commands for creating columns. Columns are especially useful for placing a graphic next to a description/explanation. The main environment for creating columns is called columns. Inside this environment, you can either place several column environments, each of which creates a new column, or use the \column command to create new columns. \begin{columns}[ options ] environment contents \end{columns} A multi-column area. Inside the environment you should place only column environments or \column commands (see below). The following options may be given: · b will cause the bottom lines of the columns to be vertically aligned. · c will cause the columns to be centered vertically relative to each other. Default, unless the global option t is used. · onlytextwidth is the same as totalwidth=\textwidth. · t will cause the first lines of the columns to be aligned. Default if global option t is used. · T is similar to the t option, but T aligns the tops of the first lines while t aligns the so-called baselines of the first lines. If strange things seem to happen in conjunction with the t option (for example if a graphic suddenly "drops down" with the t option instead of "going up,"), try using this option instead. · totalwidth= width will cause the columns to occupy not the whole page width, but only width , all told. Example:
\begin{columns}[t] \begin{column}{5cm} Two\\lines. \end{column} \begin{column}{5cm} One line (but aligned). \end{column} \end{columns}

Example:
\begin{columns}[t] \column{5cm} Two\\lines. \column[T]{5cm} \includegraphis[height=3cm]{mygraphic.jpg} \end{columns}

article This environment is ignored in article mode. lyx Use "Columns" or "ColumnsTopAligned" to create a columns environment. To pass options, insert them in TEX-mode right at the beginning of the environment in square brackets. 108

To create a column, you can either use the column environment or the \column command. \begin{column}[ placement ]{ column width } environment contents \end{column} Creates a single column of width column width . The vertical placement of the enclosing columns environment can be overruled by specifying a specific placement (t and T for the two top modes, c for centered, and b for bottom). Example: The following code has the same effect as the above examples:
\begin{columns} \begin{column}[t]{5cm} Two\\lines. \end{column} \begin{column}[t]{5cm} One line (but aligned). \end{column} \end{columns}

article This command is ignored in article mode. lyx The "Column" styles insert the command version, see below. \column[ placement ]{ column width } Starts a single column. The parameters and options are the same as for the column environment. The column automatically ends with the next occurrence of \column or of a column environment or of the end of the current columns environment. Example:
\begin{columns} \column[t]{5cm} Two\\lines. \column[t]{5cm} One line (but aligned). \end{columns}

article This command is ignored in article mode. lyx In a "Column" style, the width of the column must be given as normal text, not in TEX-mode.

11.8

Positioning Text and Graphics Absolutely
page. In specified together perhaps

Normally, beamer uses TEX's normal typesetting mechanism to position text and graphics on the certain situation you may instead wish a certain text or graphic to appear at a page position that is absolutely. This means that the position is specified relative to the upper left corner of the slide. The package textpos provides several commands for positioning text absolutely and it works with beamer. When using this package, you will typically have to specify the options overlay and absolute. For details on how to use the package, please see its documentation.

11.9

Verbatim and Fragile Text

If you wish to use a {verbatim} environment in a frame, you have to add the option [fragile] to the {frame} environment. In this case, you really have to use the {frame} environment (not the \frame command) and the \end{frame} must be alone on a single line. Using this option will cause the frame contents to be written to an external file and the read back. See the description of the {frame} environment for more details. You must also use the [fragile] option for frames that include any "fragile" text, which is any text that is not "interpreted the way text is usually interpreted by TEX." For example, if you use a package that (locally) redefined the meaning of, say, the character &, you must use this option. Inside {verbatim} environments you obviously cannot use commands like \alert<2> to highlight part of code since the text is written in, well, verbatim. There are several good packages like alltt or listings that allow you to circumvent this problem. For simple cases, the following environment can be used, which is defined by beamer: 109

\begin{semiverbatim} environment contents \end{semiverbatim} The text inside this environment is typeset like verbatim text. However, the characters \, {, and } retain their meaning. Thus, you can say things like
\alert<1->{std::cout << "AT&T likes 100% performance";}

To typeset the three characters \, {, and } you can use the commands \\ (which is redefined inside this environment--you do not need it anyway), \{, and \}. Thus in order to get typeset "\alert<1>{X}" you can write \\alert<1>\{X\}.

11.10

Abstract

The abstract environment is overlay-specificiation-aware in beamer: \begin{abstract}< action specification > environment contents \end{abstract} You can use this environment to typeset an abstract. Beamer-Color/-Font abstract These beamer-color and -font are used to typeset the abstract. If a background color is set, this background color is used as background for the whole abstract by default. Beamer-Template/-Color/-Font abstract title Color parents: titlelike This template is used for the title. By default, this inserts the word \abstractname, centered. The background color is ignored. Beamer-Template abstract begin This template is inserted at the very beginning of the abstract, before the abstract title and the environment contents is inserted. Beamer-Template abstract end This template is inserted at the end of the abstract, after the environment contents .

11.11

Verse, Quotations, Quotes

A L TEX defines three environments for typesetting quotations and verses: verse, quotation, and quote. These environments are also available in the beamer class, where they are overlay-specification-aware. If an overlay specification is given, the verse or quotation is shown only on the specified slides and is covered otherwise. The difference between a quotation and a quote is that the first has paragraph indentation, whereas the second does not. You can change the font and color used for these by changing the beamer-colors and -fonts listed below. A Unlike the standard L TEX environments, the default font theme typesets a verse in an italic serif font, quotations and quotes are typeset using an italic font (whether serif or sans-serif depends on the standard document font).

\begin{verse}< action specification > environment contents \end{verse} You can use this environment to typeset a verse. Beamer-Color/-Font verse These beamer-color and -font are used to typeset the verse. If a background color is set, this background color is used as background for the whole abstract. The default font is italic serif. Beamer-Template verse begin This template is inserted at the beginning of the verse. 110

Beamer-Template verse end This template is inserted at the end of the verse. \begin{quotation}< action specification > environment contents \end{quotation} Use this environment to typeset multi-paragraph quotations. Think again, before presenting multiparagraph quotations. Beamer-Color/-Font quotation These beamer-color and -font are used to typeset the quotation. Beamer-Template quotation begin This template is inserted at the beginning of the quotation. Beamer-Template quotation end This template is inserted at the end of the quotation. \begin{quote}< action specification > environment contents \end{quote} Use this environment to typeset a single-paragraph quotation. Beamer-Color/-Font quote These beamer-color and -font are used to typeset the quote. Beamer-Template quote begin This template is inserted at the beginning of the quote. Beamer-Template quote end This template is inserted at the end of the quote.

11.12

Fo otnotes

First a word of warning: Using footnotes is usually not a good idea. They disrupt the flow of reading. You can use the usual \footnote command. It has been augmented to take an additional option, for placing footnotes at the frame bottom instead of at the bottom of the current minipage. \footnote< overlay specification >[ options ]{ text } Inserts a footnote into the current frame. Footnotes will always be shown at the bottom of the current frame; they will never be "moved" to other frames. As usual, one can give a number as options , which will cause the footnote to use that number. The beamer class adds one additional option: · frame causes the footnote to be shown at the bottom of the frame. This is normally the default behavior anyway, but in minipages and certain blocks it makes a difference. In a minipage, the footnote is usually shown as part of the minipage rather than as part of the frame. If an overlay specification is given, this causes the footnote text to be shown only on the specified slides. The footnote symbol in the text is shown on all slides. Example: \footnote{On a fast machine.} Example: \footnote[frame,2]{Not proved.} Example: \footnote<.->{Der Spiegel, 4/04, S.\ 90.} Beamer-Template/-Color/-Font footnote This template will be used to render the footnote. Inside this template, the following two inserts can be used: · \insertfootnotetext Inserts the current footnote text. 111

· \insertfootnotemark Inserts the current footnote mark (like a raised number). This mark is computed automatically. Beamer-Color/-Font footnote mark This beamer-color/-font is used when rendering the footnote mark, both in the text and at the beginning of the footnote itself.

112

12

Graphics

In the following, the advantages and disadvantages of different possible ways of creating graphics for beamer presentations are discussed. Much of the information presented in the following is not really special to beamer, but applies to any other document class as well.

12.1

Including External Graphic Files Versus Inlines Graphics

There are two principal ways of creating TEX-documents that include graphics: Either the graphic resides in an external file that is included or the graphic is inlined, which means that TEX-file contains a bunch commands like "draw a red line from here to there." In the following, the advantages and disadvantages of these two approaches are discussed. You can use an external program, like xfig or the Gimp, to create a graphic. These programs have an option to export graphic files in a format that can then be inserted into the presentation. The main advantage is: · You can use a powerful program to create a high-quality graphic. The main disadvantages are: · You have to worry about many files. Typically there are at least two for each presentation, namely the program's graphic data file and the exported graphic file in a format that can be read by TEX. · Changing the graphic using the program does not automatically change the graphic in the presentation. A Rather, you must reexport the graphic and rerun L TEX. · It may be difficult to get the line width, fonts, and font sizes right. · Creating formulas as part of graphics is often difficult or impossible.
A You can use all the standard L TEX commands for inserting graphics, like \includegraphics (be sure to include the package graphics or graphicx). Also, the pgf package offers commands for including graphics. Either will work fine in most situations, so choose whichever you like. Like \pgfdeclareimage, \includegraphics also includes an image only once in a .pdf file, even if it used several times (as a matter of fact, the graphics package is even a bit smarter about this than pgf). However, currently only pgf offers the ability to include images that are partly transparent. At the end of this section you will find notes on how to include specific graphic formats like .eps or .jpg. lyx You can use the usual "Insert Graphic" command to insert a graphic. The commands \includegraphics, \pgfuseimage, and \pgfimage are overlay-specification-aware in beamer. If the overlay specification does not apply, the command has no effect. This is useful for creating a simple animation where each picture of the animation resides in a different file:

\begin{frame} \includegraphics<1>[height=2cm]{step1.pdf}% \includegraphics<2>[height=2cm]{step2.pdf}% \includegraphics<3>[height=2cm]{step3.pdf}% \end{frame}
A A different way of creating graphics is to insert graphic drawing commands directly into your L TEX file. There are numerous packages that help you do this. They have various degrees of sophistication. Inlining graphics suffers from none of the disadvantages mentioned above for including external graphic files, but the main disadvantage is that it is often hard to use these packages. In some sense, you "program" your graphics, which requires a bit of practice. When choosing a graphic package, there are a few things to keep in mind:

· Many packages produce poor quality graphics. This is especially true of the standard picture enviA ronment of L TEX. · Powerful packages that produce high-quality graphics often do not work together with pdflatex. · The most powerful and easiest-to-use package around, namely pstricks, does not work together with pdflatex and this is a fundamental problem. Due to the fundamental differences between pdf and PostScript, it is not possible to write a "pdflatex back-end for pstricks." 113

A solution to the above problem (though not necessarily the best) is to use the pgf package. It produces high-quality graphics and works together with pdflatex, but also with normal latex. It is not as powerful as pstricks (as pointed out above, this is because of rather fundamental reasons) and not as easy to use, but it should be sufficient in most cases. lyx Inlined graphics must currently by inserted in a large TEX-mode box. This is not very convenient.

12.2

Including Graphic Files Ending .eps or .ps

External graphic files ending with the extension .eps (Encapsulated PostScript) or .ps (PostScript) can be included if you use latex and dvips, but not when using pdflatex. This is true both for the normal graphics package and for pgf. When using pgf, do not add the extension .eps. When using graphics, do add the extension. If you have a .eps graphic and wish to use pdflatex, you can use the program ps2pdf to convert the graphic to a .pdf file. Note, however, that it is often a better idea to directly generate a .pdf if the program that produced the .eps supports this.

12.3

Including Graphic Files Ending .pdf, .jpg, .jpeg or .png

The four formats .pdf, .jpg, .jpeg, and .png can only be included by pdflatex. As before, do not add these extension when using pgf, but do add them when using graphics. If your graphic file has any of these formats and you wish/must you latex and dvips, you have to convert your graphic to .eps first.

12.4

Including Graphic Files Ending .mps

A graphic file ending .mps (MetaPost PostScript) is a special kind of Encapsulated PostScript file. Files in this format are produced by the MetaPost program. As you know, TEX is a program that converts simple plain text into beautifully typeset documents. The MetaPost program is similar, only it converts simple plain text into beautiful graphics. The MetaPost program converts a plain text file ending .mp into an .mps file (although for some unfathomable reason the extension is not added). The .mp file must contain text written in the MetaFont programming language. Since .mps files are actually also .eps files, you can use the normal \includegraphics command to include them. However, as a special bonus, you can also include such a file when using pdflatex. Normally, pdflatex cannot handle .eps files, but the .mps files produced by MetaPost have such a simple and special structure that this is possible. The graphics package implements some filters to convert such PostScript output to pdf on-the-fly. For this to work, the file should end .mps instead of .eps. The following command can be used to make the graphics package just assume the extension .mps for any file it knows nothing about (like files ending with .1, which is what MetaPost loves to produce):
\DeclareGraphicsRule{*}{mps}{*}{}

This special feature currently only works with the graphics package, not with pgf.

12.5

Including Graphic Files Ending .mmp

The format .mmp (Multi-MetaPost) is actually not format that can be included directly in a TEX-file. Rather, like a .mp file, it first has to be converted using the MetaPost program. The crucial difference between .mp and .mmp is that in the latter multiple graphics can reside in a single .mmp file (actually, multiple graphics can also reside in a .mp file, but by convention such a file is called .mmp). When running MetaPost on a .mmp file, it will create not a single encapsulated PostScript file, but several, ending .0, .1, .2, and so on. The idea is that .0 might contain a main graphics and the following pictures contain overlay material that should be incrementally added to this graphic. To include the series of resulting files, you can use the command \multiinclude from the mpmulti or from the xmpmulti package. How this program works is explained in Section 13.1.3.

114

13
13.1
13.1.1

Animations, Sounds, and Slide Transitions
Animations
Including External Animation Files

If you have created an animation using some external program (like a renderer), you can use the capabilities of the presentation program (like the Acrobat Reader) to show the animation. Unfortunately, currently there is no portable way of doing this and even the Acrobat Reader does not support this feature on all platforms. To include an animation in a presentation, you can use, for example, the package multimedia.sty which is part of the beamer package. You have to include this package explicitly. Despite being distributed as part of the beamer distribution, this package is perfectly self-sufficient and can be used independently of beamer. \usepackage{multimedia} A stand-alone package that implements several commands for including external animation and sound files in a pdf document. The package can be used together with both dvips plus ps2pdf and pdflatex, though the special sound support is available only in pdflatex. When including this package, you must also include the hyperref package. Since you will typically want to include hyperref only at the very end of the preamble, multimedia will not include hyperref itself. However, multimedia can be included both before and after hyperref. Since beamer includes hyperref automatically, you need not worry about this when creating a presentation using beamer. For including an animation in a pdf file, you can use the command \movie, which is explained below. Depending on the used options, this command will either setup the pdf file such that the viewer application (like the Acrobat Reader) itself will try to play the movie or that an external program will be called. The latter approach, though much less flexible, must be taken if the viewer application is unable to display the movie itself. \movie[ options ]{ poster text }{ movie filename } This command will insert the movie with the filename movie filename into the pdf file. The movie file must reside at some place where the viewer application will be able to find it, which is typically only the directory in which the final pdf file resides. The movie file will not be embedded into the pdf file in the sense that the actual movie data is part of the main.pdf file. The movie file must hence be copied and passed along with the pdf file. (Nevertheless, one often says that the movie is "embedded" in the document, but that just means that one can click on the movie when viewing the document and the movie will start to play.) The movie will use a rectangular area whose size is determined either by the width= and height= options or by the size of the poster text . The poster text can be any TEX text; for example, it might be a \pgfuseimage command or an \includegraphics command or a pgfpicture environment or just plain text. The poster text is typeset in a box, the box is inserted into the normal text, and the movie rectangle is put exactly over this box. Thus, if the poster text is an image from the movie, this image will be shown until the movie is started, when it will be exactly replaced by the movie itself. However, there is also a different, sometimes better, way of creating a poster image, namely by using the poster option as explained later on. The aspect ratio of the movie will not be corrected automatically if the dimension of the poster text box does not have the same aspect ratio. Most movies have an aspect ratio of 4:3 or 16:9. Despite the name, a movie may consist only of sound with no images. In this case, the posert text might be a symbol representing the sound. There is also a different, dedicated command for including sounds in a pdf file, see the \sound command in Section 13.2. Unless further options are given, the movie will start only when the user clicks on it. Whether the viewer application can actually display the movie depends on the application and the version. For example, the Acrobat Reader up to version 5 does not seem to be able to display any movies or sounds on Linux. On the other hand, the Acrobat Reader Version 6 on MacOS is able to display anything that QuickTime can display, which is just about everything. Embedding movies in a pdf document is provided for by the pdf standard and is not a peculiarity of the Acrobat Reader. In particular, one might expect other viewers like xpdf to support embedded movies in the future.

115

Example: \movie{\pgfuseimage{myposterimage}}{mymovie.avi} Example: \movie[width=3cm,height=2cm,poster]{}{mymovie.mpg} If your viewer application is not able to render your movie, but some external application is, you must use the externalviewer option. This will ask the viewer application to launch an application for showing the movie instead of displaying it itself. Since this application is started in a new window, this not nearly as nice as having the movie be displayed directly by the viewer (unless you use evil trickery to suppress the frame of the viewer application). Which application is chosen is left to the discreetion of the viewer application, which tries to make its choice according to the extension of the movie filename and according to some mapping table for mapping extensions to viewer applications. How this mapping table can be modified depends on the viewer application, please see the release notes of your viewer. The following options may be given: · autostart. Causes the movie to start playing immediately when the page is shown. At most one movie can be started in this way. The viewer application will typically be able to show only at most one movie at the same time anyway. When the page is no longer shown, the movie immediately stops. This can be a problem if you use the \movie command to include a sound that should be played on after the page has been closed. In this case, the \sound command must be used. · borderwidth= TEX dimension . Causes a border of thickness TEX dimension to be drawn around the movie. Some versions of the Acrobat Reader seem to have a bug and do not display this border if is smaller than 0.5bp (about 0.51pt). · depth= TEX dimension . Overrides the depth of the poster text box and sets it to the given dimension. · duration= time s. Specifies in seconds how long the movie should be shown. The time may be a fractional value and must be followed by the letter s. For example, duration=1.5s will show the movie for one and a half seconds. In conjunction with the start option, you can "cut out" a part of a movie for display. · externalviewer. As explained above, this causes an external application to be launched for displaying the movie in a separate window. Most options, like duration or loop, have no effect since they are not passed along to the viewer application. · height= TEX dimension . Overrides the height of the poster text box and sets it to the given dimension. · label= movie label . Assigns a label to the movie such that it can later be referenced by the command \hyperlinkmovie, which can be used to stop the movie or to show a different part of it. The movie label is not a normal label. It should not be too fancy, since it is inserted literally into the pdf code. In particular, it should not contain closing parentheses. · loop. Causes the movie to start again when the end has been reached. Normally, the movie just stops at the end. · once. Causes the movie to just stop at the end. This is the default. · palindrome. Causes the movie to start playing backwards when the end has been reached, and to start playing forward once more when the beginning is reached, and so on. · poster. Asks the viewer application to show the first image of the movie when the movie is not playing. Normally, nothing is shown when the movie is not playing (and thus the box containing the poster text is shown). For a movie that does not have any images (but sound) or for movies with an uninformative first image this option is not so useful. · repeat is the same as loop. · showcontrols= true or false . Causes a control bar to be displayed below the movie while it is playing. Instead of showcontrols=true you can also just say showcontrols. By default, no control bar is shown. · start= time s. Causes the first time seconds of the movie to be skipped. For example, start=10s,duration=5s will show seconds 10 to 15 of the movie, when you play the movie. · width= TEXdimension works like the height option, only for the width of the poster box. Example: The following example creates a "background sound" for the slide.
\movie[autostart]{}{test.wav}

116

Example: A movie with two extra buttons for showing different parts of the movie.
\movie[label=cells,width=4cm,height=3cm,poster,showcontrols,duration=5s]{}{cells.avi} \hyperlinkmovie[start=5s,duration=7s]{cells}{\beamerbutton{Show the middle stage}} \hyperlinkmovie[start=12s,duration=5s]{cells}{\beamerbutton{Show the late stage}}

A movie can serve as the destination of a special kind of hyperlink, namely a hyperlink introduced using the following command: \hyperlinkmovie[ options ]{ movie label }{ text } Causes the text to become a movie hyperlink. When you click on the text , the movie with the label movie label will start to play (or stop or pause or resume, depending on the options ). The movie must be on the same page as the hyperlink. The following options may be given, many of which are the same as for the \movie command; if a different option is given for the link than for the movie itself, the option for the link takes precedence: · duration= time s. As for \movie, this causes the movie to be played only for the given number of seconds. · loop and repeat. As for \movie, this causes the movie to loop. · once. As for \movie, this causes the movie to played only once. · palindrome. As for \movie, this causes the movie to be played forth and back. · pause. Causes the playback of the movie to be paused, if the movie was currently playing. If not, nothing happens. · play. Causes the movie to be played from whatever start position is specified. If the movie is already playing, it will be stopped and restarted at the starting position. This is the default. · resume. Resumes playback of the movie, if it has previously been paused. If has not been paused, but not started or is already playing, nothing happens. · showcontrols= true or false . As for \movie, this causes a control bar to be shown or not shown during playback. · start= time s. As for \movie, this causes the given number of seconds to be skipped at the beginning of the movie if play is used to start the movie. · stop. Causes the playback of the movie to be stopped. 13.1.2 Animations Created by Showing Slides in Rapid Succession

You can create an animation in a portable way by using the overlay commands of the beamer package to create a series of slides that, when shown in rapid succession, present an animation. This is a flexible approach, but such animations will typically be rather static since it will take some time to advance from one slide to the next. This approach is mostly useful for animations where you want to explain each "picture" of the animation. When you advance slides "by hand," that is, by pressing a forward button, it typically takes at least a second for the next slide to show. More "lively" animations can be created by relying on a capability of the viewer program. Some programs support showing slides only for a certain number of seconds during a presentation (for the Acrobat Reader this works only in full-screen mode). By setting the number of seconds to zero, you can create a rapid succession of slides. To facilitate the creation of animations using this feature, the following commands can be used: \animate and \animatevalue. \animate< overlay specification > The slides specified by overlay specification will be shown only as shortly as possible. Example:
\begin{frame} \frametitle{A Five Slide Animation} \animate<2-4>

117

The first slide is shown normally. When the second slide is shown (presumably after pressing a forward key), the second, third, and fourth slides ``flash by.'' At the end, the content of the fifth slide is shown. ... code for creating an animation with five slides ... \end{frame}

article This command is ignored in article mode. \animatevalue< start slide - end slide >{ name }{ start value }{ end value } The name must be the the slides in the specified on the current slide numb value ; on the slides after Example:
\newcount\opaqueness \begin{frame} \animate<2-10> \animatevalue<1-10>{\opaqueness}{100}{0} \begin{colormixin}{\the\opaqueness!averagebackgroundcolor} \frametitle{Fadeout Frame} This text (and all other frame content) will fade out when the second slide is shown. This even works with {\color{green!90!black}colored} \alert{text}. \end{colormixin} \end{frame} \newcount\opaqueness \newdimen\offset \begin{frame} \frametitle{Flying Theorems (You Really Shouldn't!)} \animate<2-14> \animatevalue<1-15>{\opaqueness}{100}{0} \animatevalue<1-15>{\offset}{0cm}{-5cm} \begin{colormixin}{\the\opaqueness!averagebackgroundcolor} \hskip\offset \begin{minipage}{\textwidth} \begin{theorem} This theorem flies out. \end{theorem} \end{minipage} \end{colormixin} \animatevalue<1-15>{\opaqueness}{0}{100} \animatevalue<1-15>{\offset}{-5cm}{0cm} \begin{colormixin}{\the\opaqueness!averagebackgroundcolor} \hskip\offset \begin{minipage}{\textwidth} \begin{theorem} This theorem flies in. \end{theorem} \end{minipage} \end{colormixin} \end{frame}

name of a counter or a dimension. It will be varied between two values. For range, the counter or dimension is set to an interpolated value that depends er. On slides before the start slide , the counter or dimension is set to start the end slide it is set to end value .

article This command is ignored in article mode. If your animation "graphics" reside in individual external graphic files, you might also consider using the \multiinclude command, which is explained in Section 13.1.3, together with \animate. For example, you 118

might create an animation like this, assuming you have created graphic files named animation.1 through to animation.10:
\begin{frame} \animate<2-9> \multiinclude[start=1]{animation} \end{frame}

13.1.3

Including External Animations Residing in Multiple Image Files

Some animations reside in external files in the following way: For each stage of the animation there is an image file containing an image for this stage. You can include such a series of images conveniently by using the style mpmulti.sty from the ppower4 package. This style, written by Klaus Guntermann, introduces a command called \multiinclude that takes the base name of a graphic file like mygraphic and will then search for files called mygraphic.0, mygraphic.1, and so on, till no more files are found. It will then include these graphics files using the \includegraphics command, but will put these graphics "on top of each other." Furthermore, and this is the important part, it inserts a \pause command after each graphic. This command is defined in the ppower4 package and has the same effect as the \pause command of beamer. For this reason, both ppower4 and also beamer will first display the basic graphic and will then additionally show the next graphic on each slide. If you try to use mpmulti.sty directly, you will run into the problem that it includes a file called pause.sty, which is part of the ppower4 package. You might also consider using the style xmpmulti.sty that comes with beamer. This file is mainly identical to mpmulti, except for two differences: First, it does not include pause.sty, a style that conceptually clashes with beamer, although beamer contains a workaround that sidesteps the problem. Second, it extends the \multiinclude command by allowing a special default overlay specification to be given. The effect of this is explained below. \usepackage{xmpmulti} Defines the command \multiinclude. The code of this package is due to Klaus Guntermann with some additions of mine. It can used together with beamer and with ppower4, i. e., it can be used as a replacement for mpmulti if the pause package is also included in a ppower4-presentation. \multiinclude[< default overlay specification >][ options ]{ base file name } Except for the possibility of specifying a default overlay specification , this command is identical to the \multiinclude command from the ppower4 package. If no overlay specification is given, the command will search for files called base file name . number for increasing numbers number , starting with zero. As long as it finds these files, it issues an \includegraphics command on them. The files following the first one are put "on top" of the first one. Between any two invocations of \includegraphics, a \pause command is inserted. You can modify this behaviour is different ways by given suitable options , see below. Example: Assume that MetaPost has created files called gra.0, gra.1, and gra.2. You can then create frame consisting of three slides that incrementally show the graphic as follows:
\begin{frame} \multiinclude{gra} \end{frame}

The effect of providing a default overlay specification is the following: First, no \pause command is inserted between graphics. Instead, each graphic is surrounded by an actionenv environment with the overlay specification set to default overlay specification . Example: You can create the same effect as in the previous example using \multiinclude[<+->]{gra}. Example: For a more interesting usage of the default overlay specification , consider the following usage:
\multiinclude[]{gra}

This will always paint the most recently added part of the graphic in red (assuming you do not use special colors in the graphic itself ).

119

Example: In order to have each graphic completely replace the previous one, you could use \multiinclude[<+>]{gra}. The following options may be given (these are the same as for the original command from the ppower4 package): · pause= command replaces the default pausing command \pause by command . If a default overlay specification is given, the default pausing command is empty; otherwise it is \pause. Note that commands like \pauselevel are not available in \beamer. · graphics= options passes the options to the \includegraphics command. Example: \multiinclude[graphics={height=5cm}]{gra} · format= extension will cause the file names for which we search change from base file name . number to base file name - number . extension . Note the change from the dot to a hyphen. This option allows you to include, say, .jpg files. · start= number specifies the start number . The default is zero. · end= number specifies the end number . The default is infinity. Note that, if you do not use the format= option, the \includegraphics command will be somewhat at a loss in which format your graphic file actually is. After all, it end with the cryptic "format suffix" .0 or .1. You can tell \includegraphics that any file having a suffix it knows nothing about is actually in format, say, .mps, using the following command:
\DeclareGraphicsRule{*}{mps}{*}{}

13.2

Sounds
be played when you open a slide or when a are defined in the package multimedia, which be included in a pdf presentation by treating erfectly sufficient in most cases, there are two

You can include sounds in a presentation. Such sound can certain button is clicked. The commands for including sounds is introduced in Section 13.1.1. As was already pointed out in Section 13.1.1, a sound can it as a movie and using the \movie command. While this is p cases where this approach is not satisfactory:

1. When a page is closed, any playing movie is immediately stopped. Thus, you cannot use the \movie command to create sounds that persist for a longer time. 2. You cannot play two movies at the same time. The pdf specification introduces special sound ob jects, which are treated quite differently from movie ob jects. You can create a sound ob ject using the command \sound, which is somewhat similar to \movie. There also exists a \hyperlinksound command, which is similar to \hyperlinkmovie. While it is conceptually better to use \sound for sounds, there are a number of this to consider before using it: · Several sounds can be played at the same time. In particular, it is possible to play a general sound in parallel to a (hopefully silent) movie. · A sound playback can persist after the current page is closed (though it need not). · The data of a sound file can be completely embedded in a pdf file, obliberating the need to "carry around" other files. · The sound ob jects do not work together with dvips and ps2pdf. They only work with pdflatex. · There is much less control over what part of a sound should be played. In particular, no control bar is shown and you can specify neither the start time nor the duration. · A bug in some versions of the Acrobat Reader makes it necessary to provide very exact details on the encoding of the sound file. You have to provide the sampling rate, the number of channels (mono or stereo), the number of bits per sample, and the sample encoding method (raw, signed, Alaw or µlaw). If you do not know this data or provide it incorrectly, the sound will be played incorrectly.

120

· It seems that you can only include uncompressed sound data, which can easily become huge. This is not required by the specification, but I have been unable to make the Acrobat Reader play any compressed data. Data formats that do work are .aif and .au. \sound[ options ]{ sound poster text }{ sound filename } This command will insert the sound with the filename sound filename into the pdf file. As for \movie, the file must be accessible when the sound is to be played. Unlike \movie, you can however use the option inlinesound to actually embed the sound data in the pdf file. Also as for a movie, the sound poster playing the movie. However, you might Once playback of a sound has started, sound or by use of the \hyperlinkmute text will be be put in a box that, when clicked on, will start also leave this box empty and only use the autostart option. it can only be stopped by starting the playback of a different command.

The supported sound formats depend on the viewer application. My version of the Acrobat Reader supports .aif and .au. I also need to specify information like the sampling rate, even though this information could be extracted from the sound file and even though the pdf standard specifies that the viewer application should do so. In this regard, my version of the Acrobat Reader seems to be non-standard-conforming. This command only works together with pdflatex. If you use dvips, the poster is still shown, but clicking it has no effect and no sound is embedded in any way. Example: \sound[autostart,samplingrate=22050]{}{applause.au} The following options may be given: · autostart. Causes the sound to start playing immediately when the page is shown. · automute. Causes all sounds to be muted when the current page is left. · bitspersample= 8 or 16 . Specifies the number of bits per sample in the sound file. If this number is 16, this option need not be specified. · channels= 1 or 2 . Specifies whether the sound is mono or stereo. If the sound is mono, this option need not be specified. · depth= TEX dimension . Overrides the depth of the sound poster text box and sets it to the given dimension. · encoding= method . Specifies the encoding method, which may be Raw, Signed, muLaw, or ALaw. If the method is muLaw, this option need not be specified. · height= TEX dimension . Overrides the height of the sound poster text box and sets it to the given dimension. · inlinesound causes the sound data to be stored directly in the pdf-file. · label= sound label . Assigns a label to the sound such that it can later be referenced by the command \hyperlinksound, which can be used to start a sound. The sound label is not a normal label. · loop or repeat. Causes the sound to start again when the end has been reached. · mixsound= true or false . If set to true, the sound is played in addition to any sound that is already playing. If set to false all other sounds (though not sound from movies) are stopped before the the sound is played. The default is false. · samplingrate= number . Specifies the number of samples per second in the sound file. If this number is 44100, this option need not be specified. · width= TEX dimension works like the height option, only for the width of the poster box. Example: The following example creates a "background sound" for the slide, assuming that applause.au is encoded correctly (44100 samples per second, mono, µlaw encoded, 16 bits per sample).
\sound[autostart]{}{applause.au}

Just like movies, sounds can also serve as destinations of special sound hyperlinks.

121

\hyperlinksound[ options ]{ sound label }{ text } Causes the text to become a sound hyperlink. When you click on the text , the sound with the label sound label will start to play. The following options may be given: · loop or repeat. Causes the sound to start again when the end has been reached. · mixsound= true or false . If set to true, the sound is played in addition to any sound that is already playing. If set to false all other sounds (though not sound from movies) is stopped before the the sound is played. The default is false. Since there is no direct way of stopping the playback of a sound, the following command is useful: \hyperlinkmute{ text } Causes the text to become a hyperlink that, when clicked, stops the playback of all sounds.

13.3

Slide Transitions

pdf in general, and the Acrobat Reader in particular, offer a standardized way of defining slide transitions. Such a transition is a visual effect that is used to show the slide. For example, instead of just showing the slide immediately, whatever was shown before might slowly "dissolve" and be replaced by the slide's content. There are a number of commands that can be used to specify what effect should be used when the current slide is presented. Consider the following example:
\frame{\pgfuseimage{youngboy}} \frame{ \transdissolve \pgfuseimage{man} }

The command \transdissolve causes the slide of the second frame to be shown in a "dissolved way." Note that the dissolving is a property of the second frame, not of the first one. We could have placed the command anywhere on the frame. The transition commands are overlay-specification-aware. We could collapse the two frames into one frame like this:
\begin{frame} \only<1>{\pgfuseimage{youngboy}} \only<2>{\pgfuseimage{man}} \transdissolve<2> \end{frame}

This states that on the first slide the young boy should be shown, on the second slide the old man should be shown, and when the second slide is shown, it should be shown in a "dissolved way." In the following, the different commands for creating transitional effects are listed. All of them take an optional argument that may contain a list of key = value pairs. The following options are possible: · duration= seconds . Specifies the number of seconds the transition effect needs. Default is one second, but often a shorter one (like 0.2 seconds) is more appropriate. Viewer applications, especially Acrobat, may interpret this option in slightly strange ways. · direction= degree . For "directed" effects, this option specifies the effect's direction. Allowed values are 0, 90, 180, 270, and for the glitter effect also 315. article All of these commands are ignored in article mode. lyx You must insert these commands using TEX-mode. \transblindshorizontal< overlay specification >[ options ] Show the slide as if horizontal blinds where pulled away. Example: \transblindshorizontal

122

\transblindsvertical< overlay specification >[ options ] Show the slide as if vertical blinds where pulled away. Example: \transblindsvertical<2,3> \transboxin< overlay specification >[ options ] Show the slide by moving to the center from all four sides. Example: \transboxin<1> \transboxout< overlay specification >[ options ] Show the slide by showing more and more of a rectangular area that is centered on the slide center. Example: \transboxout \transdissolve< overlay specification >[ options ] Show the slide by slowly dissolving what was shown before. Example: \transdissolve[duration=0.2] \transglitter< overlay specification >[ options ] Show the slide with a glitter effect that sweeps in the specified direction. Example: \transglitter<2-3>[direction=90] \transsplitverticalin< overlay specification >[ options ] Show the slide by sweeping two vertical lines from the sides inward. Example: \transsplitverticalin \transsplitverticalout< overlay specification >[ options ] Show the slide by sweeping two vertical lines from the center outward. Example: \transsplitverticalout \transsplithorizontalin< overlay specification >[ options ] Show the slide by sweeping two horizontal lines from the sides inward. Example: \transsplithorizontalin \transsplithorizontalout< overlay specification >[ options ] Show the slide by sweeping two horizontal lines from the center outward. Example: \transsplithorizontalout \transwipe< overlay specification >[ options ] Show the slide by sweeping a single line in the specified direction, thereby "wiping out" the previous contents. Example: \transwipe[direction=90] You can also specify how long a given slide should be shown, using the following overlay-specificationaware command: \transduration< overlay specification >{ number of seconds } In full screen mode, show the slide for number of seconds . In zero is specified, the slide is shown as short as possible. This can be used to create interesting pseudo-animations. Example: \transduration<2>{1}

123

Part I I I

Changing the Way Things Lo ok
beamer offers ways to change the appearance of an appearance at all levels of detail. On the top level, themes can be used to globally change the appearance conveniently. On the bottom level, templates allow you to specify the appearance of every minute detail individually. Two important aspects of the "appearance" of a presentation are treated in extra sections: colors and fonts. Here, too, color and font themes can be used to globally change the colors or fonts used in a presentation, while you can still change the color or font of, say, block titles independently of everything else.

124

14
14.1

Themes
Five Flavors of Themes

Themes make it easy to change the appearance of a presentation. The beamer class uses five different kinds of themes: Presentation Themes Conceptually, a presentation theme dictates for every single detail of a presentation what it looks like. Thus, choosing a particular presentation theme will setup for, say, the numbers in enumeration what color they have, what color their background has, what font is used to render them, whether a circle or ball or rectangle or whatever is drawn behind them, and so forth. Thus, when you choose a presentation theme, your presentation will look the way someone (the creator of the theme) thought that a presentation should look like. Presentation themes typically only choose a particular color theme, font theme, inner theme, and outer theme that go well together. Color Themes A color theme only dictates which colors are used in a presentation. If you have chosen a particular presentation theme and then choose a color theme, only the colors of your presentation will change. A color theme can specify colors in a very detailed way: For example, a color theme can specifically change the colors used to render, say, the border of a button, the background of a button, and the text on a button. Font Themes A font theme dictates which fonts or font attributes are used in a presentation. As for colors, the font of all text elements used in a presentation can be specified independently. Inner Themes An inner theme specifies how certain elements of a presentation are typeset. This includes all elements that are at the "inside" of the frame, that is, that are not part of the headline, footline, or sidebars. This includes all enumerations, itemize environments, block environments, theorem environments, or the table of contents. For example, an inner theme might specify that in an enumeration the number should be typeset without a dot and that a small circle should be shown behind it. The inner theme would not specify what color should be used for the number or the circle (this is the job of the color theme) nor which font should be used (this is the job of the font theme). Outer Themes An outer look like. It specifies a sidebar, where the where the frametitle theme specifies what the "outside" or "border" of the presentation slides should whether there are head- and footlines, what is shown in them, whether there is logo goes, where the navigation symbols and bars go, and so on. It also specifies is put and how it is typeset.

The different themes reside in the four subdirectories theme, color, font, inner, and outer of the directory beamer/themes. Internally, a theme is stored as a normal style file. However, to use a theme, the following special commands should be used: \usetheme[ options ]{ name list } Installs the presentation theme named name . Currently, the effect of this command is the same as saying \usepackage for the style file named beamertheme name .sty for each name in the name list . \usecolortheme[ options ]{ name list } Same as \usetheme, only for color themes. Color style files are named beamercolortheme name .sty. \usefonttheme[ options ]{ name } Same as \usetheme, only for font themes. Font style files are named beamerfonttheme name .sty. \useinnertheme[ options ]{ name } Same as \usetheme, only for inner themes. Inner style files are named beamerinnertheme name .sty. \useoutertheme[ options ]{ name } Same as \usetheme, only for outer themes. Outer style files are named beameroutertheme name .sty. If you do not use any of these commands, a sober default theme is used for all of them. In the following, the presentation themes that come with the beamer class are described. The element, layout, color, and font themes are presented in the following sections. 125

14.2

Presentation Themes without Navigation Bars

A presentation theme dictates for every single detail of a presentation what it looks like. Normally, having chosen a particular presentation theme, you do not need to specify anything else having to do with the appearance of your presentation--the creator of the theme should have taken of that for you. However, you still can change things afterward either by using a different color, font, element, or even layout theme; or by changing specific colors, fonts, or templates directly. When I started naming the presentation themes, I soon ran out of ideas on how to call them. Instead of giving them more and more cumbersome names, I decided to switch to a different naming convention: Except for two special cases, all presentation themes are named after cities. These cities happen to be cities in which or near which there was a conference or workshop that I attended or that a co-author of mine attended. If a theme has not been developped by me (that is, if someone else is to blame), this is indicated with the theme. I have sometimes slightly changed or "corrected" submitted themes, but I still list the original authors. \usetheme{default} Example:
There Is No Largest Prime Number
The proof uses reductio ad absurdum.

There Is No Largest Prime Number
With an introduction to a new proof technique

Theorem
Euklid of Alexandria
Depar tment of Mathematics University of Alexandria

There is no largest prime number.

Proof.
1. Suppose p were the largest prime number. 2. Let q be the product of the first p numbers. 3. Then q + 1 is not divisible by any of them. 4. Thus q + 1 is also prime and greater than p.

27th International Symposium on Prime Numbers, 280

Results Proof of the Main Theorem

As the name suggests, this theme is installed by default. It is a sober no-nonsense theme that makes minimal use of color or font variations. This theme is useful for all kinds of talks, except for very long talks. \usetheme[headheight= head height ,footheight= foot height ]{boxes} Example:
There Is No Largest Prime Number
The proof uses reductio ad absurdum.

There Is No Largest Prime Number
With an introduction to a new proof technique

Theorem
Euklid of Alexandria
Depar tment of Mathematics University of Alexandria

There is no largest prime number.

Proof.
1. Suppose p were the largest prime number. 2. Let q be the product of the first p numbers. 3. Then q + 1 is not divisible by any of them. 4. Thus q + 1 is also prime and greater than p. Results Proof of the Main Theorem

27th International Symposium on Prime Numbers, 280

For this theme, you can specify an arbitrary number of templates for the boxes in the headline and in the footline. You can add a template for another box by using the following commands. \addheadbox{ beamer color }{ box template } Each time this command is invoked, a new box is added to the head line, with the first added box being shown on the left. All boxes will have the same size. 126

The beamer color will be used to setup the foreground and background colors of the box. Example:
\addheadbox{section in head/foot}{\tiny\quad 1. Box} \addheadbox{structure}{\tiny\quad 2. Box}

A similar effect as the above commands can be achieved by directly installing a head template that contains two beamercolorboxes:
\setbeamertemplate{headline} {\leavevmode \begin{beamercolorbox}[width=.5\paperwidth]{section in head/foot} \tiny\quad 1. Box \end{beamercolorbox}% \begin{beamercolorbox}[width=.5\paperwidth]{structure} \tiny\quad 2. Box \end{beamercolorbox} }

While being more complicated, the above commands offer more flexibility. \addfootbox{ beamer color }{ box template } Example:
\addfootbox{section in head/foot}{\tiny\quad 1. Box} \addfootbox{structure}{\tiny\quad 2. Box}

\usetheme[ options ]{Bergen} Example:
There Is No Largest Prime Number There Is No Largest Prime Number
With an introduction to a new proof technique
The proof uses reductio ad absurdum.

Who? From? When?

Euklid of Alexandria
Depar tment of Mathematics University of Alexandria

Theorem Proof.
1

There is no largest prime number.

Suppose p were the largest prime number. Let q be the product of the first p numbers. Then q + 1 is not divisible by any of them. Thus q + 1 is also prime and greater than p.

27th International Symposium on Prime Numbers, 280

2 3 4

Results Proof of the Main Theorem

A theme based on the inmargin inner theme and the rectangles inner theme. Using this theme is not quite trivial since getting the spacing right can be trickier than with most other themes. Also, this theme goes badly with columns. You may wish to consult the remarks on the inmargin inner theme. Bergen is a town in Norway. It hosted iwpec 2004. \usetheme[ options ]{Boadilla} Example:
There Is No Largest Prime Number
The proof uses reductio ad absurdum.

There Is No Largest Prime Number
With an introduction to a new proof technique

Theorem
Euklid of Alexandria
Depar tment of Mathematics University of Alexandria

There is no largest prime number.

Proof.
1 2 3 4

Suppose p were the largest prime number. Let q be the product of the first p numbers. Then q + 1 is not divisible by any of them. Thus q + 1 is also prime and greater than p.

27th International Symposium on Prime Numbers, 280

1

Results Proof of the Main Theorem

Euklid (Univ. Alexandria)

There Is No Largest Prime Number

ISPN '80

1/2

Euklid (Univ. Alexandria)

There Is No Largest Prime Number

ISPN '80

2/2

127

A theme giving much information on little space. The following options may be given: · secheader causes a headline to be inserted showing the current section and subsection. By default, this headline is not shown. Theme author: Manuel Carro. Boadilla is a village in the vicinity of Madrid, hosting the Univeristy's Computer Science department. \usetheme[ options ]{Madrid} Example:
There Is No Largest Prime Number
The proof uses reductio ad absurdum.

There Is No Largest Prime Number
With an introduction to a new proof technique

Theorem
Euklid of Alexandria
Depar tment of Mathematics University of Alexandria

There is no largest prime number.

Proof.
1

Suppose p were the largest prime number. Let q be the product of the first p numbers. Then q + 1 is not divisible by any of them. Thus q + 1 is also prime and greater than p.

27th International Symposium on Prime Numbers, 280

2 3 4

1

Results Proof of the Main Theorem

Euklid (Univ. Alexandria)

There Is No Largest Prime Number

ISPN '80

1/2

Euklid (Univ. Alexandria)

There Is No Largest Prime Number

ISPN '80

2/2

Like the Boadilla theme, except that stronger colors are used and that the itemize icons are not modified. The same options as for the Boadilla theme may be given. Theme author: Manuel Carro. Madrid is the capital of Spain. \usetheme{AnnArbor} Example:
Results Proof of the Main Theorem

There Is No Largest Prime Number
The proof uses reductio ad absurdum.

There Is No Largest Prime Number
With an introduction to a new proof technique Theorem There is no largest prime number. Proof.
1 2

Euklid of Alexandria
Depar tment of Mathematics University of Alexandria

Suppose p were the largest prime number. Let q be the product of the first p numbers. Then q + 1 is not divisible by any of them. Thus q + 1 is also prime and greater than p.

27th International Symposium on Prime Numbers, 280

3 4

Euklid (Univ. Alexandria)

There Is No Largest Prime Number

ISPN '80

1/1

Euklid (Univ. Alexandria)

There Is No Largest Prime Number

ISPN '80

2/1

Like Boadille, but using the colors of the University of Michigan. Theme author: Madhusudan Singh. The University of Michigan is located at Ann Arbor. \usetheme{CambridgeUS} Example:

128

Results

Proof of the Main Theorem

There Is No Largest Prime Number
The proof uses reductio ad absurdum.

There Is No Largest Prime Number
With an introduction to a new proof technique Theorem There is no largest prime number. Proof.
1 2

Euklid of Alexandria
Depar tment of Mathematics University of Alexandria

Suppose p were the largest prime number. Let q be the product of the first p numbers. Then q + 1 is not divisible by any of them. Thus q + 1 is also prime and greater than p.

27th International Symposium on Prime Numbers, 280

3 4

Euklid (Univ. Alexandria)

There Is No Largest Prime Number

ISPN '80

1/1

Euklid (Univ. Alexandria)

There Is No Largest Prime Number

ISPN '80

2/1

Like Boadille, but using the colors of the MIT. Theme author: Madhusudan Singh. \usetheme{Pittsburgh} Example:
There Is No Largest Prime Number There Is No Largest Prime Number
With an introduction to a new proof technique
The proof uses reductio ad absurdum.

Euklid of Alexandria
Depar tment of Mathematics University of Alexandria

Theorem
There is no largest prime number.

Proof.
1

Suppose p were the largest prime number. Let q be the product of the first p numbers. Then q + 1 is not divisible by any of them. Thus q + 1 is also prime and greater than p.

27th International Symposium on Prime Numbers, 280

2 3 4

1 Results

Proof of the Main Theorem

A sober theme. The right-flushed frame titles creates an interesting "tension" inside each frame. Pittsburgh is a town in the eastern USA. It hosts the second recomb workshop of snps and haplotypes, 2004. \usetheme[ options ]{Rochester} Example:
There Is No Largest Prime Number
The proof uses reductio ad absurdum.

There Is No Largest Prime Number
With an introduction to a new proof technique

Theorem There is no largest prime number. Proof.
1 2 3 4

Euklid of Alexandria
Depar tment of Mathematics University of Alexandria

Suppose p were the largest prime number. Let q be the product of the first p numbers. Then q + 1 is not divisible by any of them. Thus q + 1 is also prime and greater than p.

27th International Symposium on Prime Numbers, 280
1

Results Proof of the Main Theorem

A dominant theme without any navigational elements. It can be made less dominant by using a different color theme. The following options may be given: 129

· height= dimension sets the height of the frame title bar. Rochester is a town in upstate New York, USA. I visited Rochester in 2001.

14.3

Presentation Themes with a Tree-Like Navigation Bar

\usetheme{Antibes} Example:
There Is No Largest Prime Number There Is No Largest Prime Number Results Proof of the Main Theorem

There Is No Largest Prime Number
The proof uses reductio ad absurdum.

There Is No Largest Prime Number
With an introduction to a new proof technique Theorem Euklid of Alexandria
Depar tment of Mathematics University of Alexandria

There is no largest prime number. Proof.
1

Suppose p were the largest prime number. Let q be the product of the first p numbers. Then q + 1 is not divisible by any of them. Thus q + 1 is also prime and greater than p.

27th International Symposium on Prime Numbers, 280

2 3

1

Results Proof of the Main Theorem

4

A dominant theme with a tree-like navigation at the top. The rectangular elements mirror the rectangular navigation at the top. The theme can be made less dominant by using a different color theme. Antibes is a town in the south of France. It hosted stacs 2002. \usetheme{JuanLesPins} Example:
There Is No Largest Prime Number There Is No Largest Prime Number Results Proof of the Main Theorem

There Is No Largest Prime Number
The proof uses reductio ad absurdum.

There Is No Largest Prime Number
With an introduction to a new proof technique Theorem There is no largest prime number. Proof.
1 2

Euklid of Alexandria
Depar tment of Mathematics University of Alexandria

Suppose p were the largest prime number. Let q be the product of the first p numbers. Then q + 1 is not divisible by any of them. Thus q + 1 is also prime and greater than p.

27th International Symposium on Prime Numbers, 280

3 4

1

Results Proof of the Main Theorem

A variation on the Antibes theme that has a much "smoother" appearance. It can be made less dominant by choosing a different color theme. JuanLesPins is a cozy village near Antibes. It hosted stacs 2002. \usetheme{Montpellier} Example:

130

There Is No Largest Prime Number

There Is No Largest Prime Number Results Proof of the Main Theorem

There Is No Largest Prime Number
The proof uses reductio ad absurdum.

There Is No Largest Prime Number
With an introduction to a new proof technique

Theorem
Euklid of Alexandria
Depar tment of Mathematics University of Alexandria

There is no largest prime number.

Proof.
1. Suppose p were the largest prime number. 2. Let q be the product of the first p numbers. 27th International Symposium on Prime Numbers, 280 Results Proof of the Main Theorem 3. Then q + 1 is not divisible by any of them. 4. Thus q + 1 is also prime and greater than p.

A sober theme giving basic navigational hints. The headline can be made more dominant by using a different color theme. Montpellier is in the south of France. It hosted stacs 2004.

14.4

Presentation Themes with a Table of Contents Sidebar

\usetheme[ options ]{Berkeley} Example:
There Is No Largest Prime Number
The proof uses reductio ad absurdum.
There Is No Largest Prime Number Euklid Results
Proof of the Main Theorem

There Is No Largest Prime Number

There Is No Largest Prime Number
With an introduction to a new proof technique

Euklid

Theorem
Results
Proof of the Main Theorem

There is no largest prime number. Proof.
1 2 3 4

Euklid of Alexandria
Depar tment of Mathematics University of Alexandria

Suppose p were the largest prime number. Let q be the product of the first p numbers. Then q + 1 is not divisible by any of them. Thus q + 1 is also prime and greater than p.

27th International Symposium on Prime Numbers, 280
1

Results Proof of the Main Theorem

A dominant theme. If the navigation bar is on the left, it dominates since it is seen first. The height of the frame title is fixed to two and a half lines, thus you should be careful with overly long titles. A logo will be put in the corner area. Rectangular areas dominate the layout. The theme can be made less dominant by using a different color theme. By default, the current entry of the table of contents in the sidebar will be hilighted by using a more vibrant color. A good alternative is to hilight the current entry by using a different color for the background of the current point. The color theme sidebartab installs the appropriate colors, so you just have to say
\usecolorhteme{sidebartab}

This color theme works with all themes that show a table of contents in the sidebar. This theme is useful for long talks like lectures that require a table of contents to be visible all the time. The following options may be given: · hideallsubsections causes only sections to be shown in the sidebar. This is useful, if you need to save space. · hideothersubsections causes only the subsections of the current section to be shown. This is useful, if you need to save space. · left puts the sidebar on the left (default). · right puts the sidebar on the right. 131

· width= dimension sets the width of the sidebar. If set to zero, no sidebar is created. Berkeley is on the western coast of the USA, near San Francisco. I visited Berkeley for a year in 2004. \usetheme[ options ]{PaloAlto} Example:
There Is No Largest Prime Number
The proof uses reductio ad absurdum.
There Is No Largest Prime Number Euklid Results
Proof of the Main Theorem

There Is No Largest Prime Number

There Is No Largest Prime Number
With an introduction to a new proof technique

Euklid Results
Proof of the Main Theorem

Theorem There is no largest prime number. Proof.
1

Euklid of Alexandria
Depar tment of Mathematics University of Alexandria

Suppose p were the largest prime number. Let q be the product of the first p numbers. Then q + 1 is not divisible by any of them. Thus q + 1 is also prime and greater than p.

2 3

27th International Symposium on Prime Numbers, 280
1

4

Results Proof of the Main Theorem

A variation in the Berkeley theme with less dominance of rectangular areas. The same options as for the Berkeley theme can be given. Palo Alto is also near San Francisco. It hosted the Bay Area Theory Workshop 2004. \usetheme[ options ]{Goettingen} Example:
There Is No Largest Prime Number Euklid

There Is No Largest Prime Number
The proof uses reductio ad absurdum.

There Is No Largest Prime Number Euklid Results
Proof of the Main Theorem

There Is No Largest Prime Number
With an introduction to a new proof technique

Results
Proof of the Main Theorem

Theorem
Euklid of Alexandria
Depar tment of Mathematics University of Alexandria

There is no largest prime number.

Proof.
1. Suppose p were the largest prime number. 2. Let q be the product of the first p numbers. 3. Then q + 1 is not divisible by any of them. 4. Thus q + 1 is also prime and greater than p.

27th International Symposium on Prime Numbers, 280

Results Proof of the Main Theorem

A relatively sober theme useful for a longer talk that demands a sidebar with a full table of contents. The same options as for the Berkeley theme can be given. GЁ ingen is a town in Germany. It hosted the 42nd Theorietag. ott \usetheme[ options ]{Marburg} Example:

132

There Is No Largest Prime Number Euklid

There Is No Largest Prime Number
The proof uses reductio ad absurdum.

There Is No Largest Prime Number Euklid Results
Proof of the Main Theorem

There Is No Largest Prime Number
With an introduction to a new proof technique

Results
Proof of the Main Theorem

Theorem
Euklid of Alexandria
Depar tment of Mathematics University of Alexandria

There is no largest prime number.

Proof.
1. Suppose p were the largest prime number. 2. Let q be the product of the first p numbers. 3. Then q + 1 is not divisible by any of them. 4. Thus q + 1 is also prime and greater than p.

27th International Symposium on Prime Numbers, 280

Results Proof of the Main Theorem

A very dominant variation of the Goettingen theme. The same options may be given. Marburg is a town in Germany. It hosted the 46th Theorietag. \usetheme[ options ]{Hannover} Example:
There Is No Largest Prime Number Euklid Results
Proof of the Main Theorem

There Is No Largest Prime Number Euklid

There Is No Largest Prime Number
With an introduction to a new proof technique

There Is No Largest Prime Number
The proof uses reductio ad absurdum.

Results
Proof of the Main Theorem

Euklid of Alexandria
Depar tment of Mathematics University of Alexandria

Theorem
There is no largest prime number.

Proof.
1 2 3

27th International Symposium on Prime Numbers, 280

Suppose p were the largest prime number. Let q be the product of the first p numbers. Then q + 1 is not divisible by any of them. Thus q + 1 is also prime and greater than p.

1 Results

4

Proof of the Main Theorem

In this theme, the sidebar on the left is balanced by right-flushed frame titles. The following options may be given: · hideallsubsections causes only sections to be shown in the sidebar. This is useful, if you need to save space. · hideothersubsections causes only the subsections of the current section to be shown. This is useful, if you need to save space. · width= dimension sets the width of the sidebar. Hannover is a town in Germany. It hosted the 48th Theorietag.

14.5

Presentation Themes with a Mini Frame Navigation

\usetheme[ options ]{Berlin} Example:

133

Results

Results Proof of the Main Theorem

There Is No Largest Prime Number
The proof uses reductio ad absurdum.

There Is No Largest Prime Number
With an introduction to a new proof technique Theorem There is no largest prime number. Euklid of Alexandria
Depar tment of Mathematics University of Alexandria

Proof.
1

Suppose p were the largest prime number. Let q be the product of the first p numbers. Then q + 1 is not divisible by any of them. Thus q + 1 is also prime and greater than p.

27th International Symposium on Prime Numbers, 280
1

2 3

Results Proof of the Main Theorem
Univ. Alexandria Euklid

4

Euklid There Is No Largest Prime Number

Univ. Alexandria

There Is No Largest Prime Number

A dominant theme with strong colors and dominating rectangular areas. The head- and footlines give lots of information and leave little space for the actual slide contents. This theme is useful for conferences where the audience is not likely to know the title of the talk or who is presenting it. The theme can be made less dominant by using a different color theme. The following options may be given: · compress causes the mini frames in the headline to use only a single line. This is useful for saving space. Berlin is the capital of Germany. \usetheme[ options ]{Ilmenau} Example:
Results Results Proof of the Main Theorem

There Is No Largest Prime Number
The proof uses reductio ad absurdum.

There Is No Largest Prime Number
With an introduction to a new proof technique Euklid of Alexandria
Depar tment of Mathematics University of Alexandria

Theorem There is no largest prime number. Proof.
1 2 3

Suppose p were the largest prime number. Let q be the product of the first p numbers. Then q + 1 is not divisible by any of them. Thus q + 1 is also prime and greater than p.

27th International Symposium on Prime Numbers, 280
1

Results Proof of the Main Theorem
Univ. Alexandria Euklid

4

Euklid There Is No Largest Prime Number

Univ. Alexandria

There Is No Largest Prime Number

A variation on the Berlin theme. The same options may be given. Ilemanu is a town in Germany. It hosted the 40th Theorietag. \usetheme{Dresden} Example:

134

Results

Results Proof of the Main Theorem

There Is No Largest Prime Number
The proof uses reductio ad absurdum.

There Is No Largest Prime Number
With an introduction to a new proof technique

Theorem
Euklid of Alexandria
Depar tment of Mathematics University of Alexandria

There is no largest prime number.

Proof.
1. Suppose p were the largest prime number. 2. Let q be the product of the first p numbers. 27th International Symposium on Prime Numbers, 280 Results Proof of the Main Theorem
Euklid There Is No Largest Prime Number Univ. Alexandria Euklid There Is No Largest Prime Number Univ. Alexandria

3. Then q + 1 is not divisible by any of them. 4. Thus q + 1 is also prime and greater than p.

A variation on the Berlin theme with a strong separation into navigational stuff at the top/bottom and a sober main text. The same options may be given. Dresden is a town in Germany. It hosted STACS 2001. \usetheme{Darmstadt} Example:
Results Results Proof of the Main Theorem

There Is No Largest Prime Number
The proof uses reductio ad absurdum.

There Is No Largest Prime Number
With an introduction to a new proof technique Theorem There is no largest prime number. Euklid of Alexandria
Depar tment of Mathematics University of Alexandria

Proof.
1 2

Suppose p were the largest prime number. Let q be the product of the first p numbers. Then q + 1 is not divisible by any of them. Thus q + 1 is also prime and greater than p.

27th International Symposium on Prime Numbers, 280

3 4

1

Results Proof of the Main Theorem

A theme with a strong separation into a navigational upper part and an informational main part. By using a different color theme, this separation can be lessened. Darmstadt is a town in Germany. \usetheme{Frankfurt} Example:
Results Results

There Is No Largest Prime Number
The proof uses reductio ad absurdum.

There Is No Largest Prime Number
With an introduction to a new proof technique Theorem There is no largest prime number. Euklid of Alexandria
Depar tment of Mathematics University of Alexandria

Proof.
1 2

Suppose p were the largest prime number. Let q be the product of the first p numbers. Then q + 1 is not divisible by any of them. Thus q + 1 is also prime and greater than p.

27th International Symposium on Prime Numbers, 280

3 4

1

Results Proof of the Main Theorem

A variation on the Darmstadt theme that is slightly less cluttered by leaving out the subsection information. Frankfurt is a town in Germany. 135

\usetheme{Singapore} Example:
Results Results

There Is No Largest Prime Number
The proof uses reductio ad absurdum.

There Is No Largest Prime Number
With an introduction to a new proof technique

Theorem
Euklid of Alexandria
Depar tment of Mathematics University of Alexandria

There is no largest prime number.

Proof.
1. Suppose p were the largest prime number. 2. Let q be the product of the first p numbers. 27th International Symposium on Prime Numbers, 280 3. Then q + 1 is not divisible by any of them. 4. Thus q + 1 is also prime and greater than p. Results Proof of the Main Theorem

A not-too-sober theme with navigation that does not dominate. Singapore is located in south-eastern Asia. It hosted cocoon 2002. \usetheme{Szeged} Example:
Results Results Proof of the Main Theorem

There Is No Largest Prime Number There Is No Largest Prime Number
With an introduction to a new proof technique
The proof uses reductio ad absurdum.

Theorem
There is no largest prime number. Euklid of Alexandria

Proof.
Depar tment of Mathematics University of Alexandria

1. Suppose p were the largest prime number. 2. Let q be the product of the first p numbers. 3. Then q + 1 is not divisible by any of them. 4. Thus q + 1 is also prime and greater than p.

27th International Symposium on Prime Numbers, 280 Results Proof of the Main Theorem
There Is No Largest Prime Number Univ. Alexandria

There Is No Largest Prime Number

Univ. Alexandria

A sober theme with a strong dominance of horizontal lines. Szeged is on the south border of Hungary. It hosted dlt 2003.

14.6

Presentation Themes with Section and Subsection Tables

\usetheme{Copenhagen} Example:
Results Results Proof of the Main Theorem

There Is No Largest Prime Number
The proof uses reductio ad absurdum.

There Is No Largest Prime Number
With an introduction to a new proof technique Euklid of Alexandria
Depar tment of Mathematics University of Alexandria

Theorem There is no largest prime number. Proof.
1

Suppose p were the largest prime number. Let q be the product of the first p numbers. Then q + 1 is not divisible by any of them. Thus q + 1 is also prime and greater than p.

27th International Symposium on Prime Numbers, 280

2 3 4

1

Results Proof of the Main Theorem

Euklid

There Is No Largest Prime Number

Euklid

There Is No Largest Prime Number

136

A not-quite-too-dominant theme. This theme gives compressed information about the current section and subsection at the top and about the title and the author at the bottom. No shadows are used, giving the presentation a "flat" look. The theme can be made less dominant by using a different color theme. Copenhagen is the capital of Denmark. It is connected to MalmЁ by the ьresund bridge. o \usetheme{Luebeck} Example:
Results Results Proof of the Main Theorem

There Is No Largest Prime Number
The proof uses reductio ad absurdum.

There Is No Largest Prime Number
With an introduction to a new proof technique Theorem Euklid of Alexandria
Depar tment of Mathematics University of Alexandria

There is no largest prime number. Proof.
1

Suppose p were the largest prime number. Let q be the product of the first p numbers. Then q + 1 is not divisible by any of them. Thus q + 1 is also prime and greater than p.

27th International Symposium on Prime Numbers, 280

2 3

1

Results Proof of the Main Theorem

4

Euklid

There Is No Largest Prime Number

Euklid

There Is No Largest Prime Number

A variation on the Copenhagen theme. Lubeck is a town in nothern Germany. It hosted the 41st Theorietag. Ё \usetheme{Malmoe} Example:
Results Results Proof of the Main Theorem

There Is No Largest Prime Number
The proof uses reductio ad absurdum.

There Is No Largest Prime Number
With an introduction to a new proof technique

Theorem
There is no largest prime number. Euklid of Alexandria

Proof.
Depar tment of Mathematics University of Alexandria

1. Suppose p were the largest prime number. 2. Let q be the product of the first p numbers. 3. Then q + 1 is not divisible by any of them. 4. Thus q + 1 is also prime and greater than p.

27th International Symposium on Prime Numbers, 280

Results Proof of the Main Theorem

Euklid

There Is No Largest Prime Number

Euklid

There Is No Largest Prime Number

A more sober variation of the Copenhagen theme. MalmЁ is a town in southern Sweden. It hosted fct 2001. o \usetheme{Warsaw} Example:

137

Results

Results

Proof of the Main Theorem

There Is No Largest Prime Number
The proof uses reductio ad absurdum.

There Is No Largest Prime Number
With an introduction to a new proof technique Theorem There is no largest prime number. Proof.
1 2

Euklid of Alexandria
Depar tment of Mathematics University of Alexandria

Suppose p were the largest prime number. Let q be the product of the first p numbers. Then q + 1 is not divisible by any of them. Thus q + 1 is also prime and greater than p.

27th International Symposium on Prime Numbers, 280

3 4

1

Results Proof of the Main Theorem
Euklid There Is No Largest Prime Number Euklid There Is No Largest Prime Number

A dominant variation of the Copenhagen theme. Warsaw is the capital of Poland. It hosted mfcs 2002.

14.7

Presentation Themes Included For Compatibility

Earlier versions of beamer included some further themes. These themes are still available for compatibility, though they are now implemented differently (they also mainly install appropriate color, font, inner, and outer themes). However, they may or may not honour color themes and they will not be supported in the future. The following list shows which of the new themes should be used instead of the old themes. (When switching, you may want to use the font theme structurebold with the option onlysmall.) Old theme none bars classic lined plain sidebar shadow split tree Replacement options Use compatibility. Try Dresden instead. Try Singapore instead. Try Szeged instead. Try none or Pittsburgh instead. Try Goettingen for the light version and Marburg for the dark version. Try Warsaw instead. Try Malmoe instead. Try Montpellier and, for the bars version, Antibes or JuansLesPins.

138

15

Inner Themes, Outer Themes, and Templates

This section discusses the inner and outer themes that are available in beamer. These themes install certain templates for the different elements of a presentation. The template mechanism is explained at the end of the section. Before we plunge into the details, let us agree on some terminology for this section. In beamer, an element is part of a presentation that is potentially typeset in some special way. Examples of elements are frame titles, the author's name, or the footnote sign. The appearance of every element is governed by a template for this element. Appropriate templates are installed by inner and outer themes, where the inner themes only install templates for elements that are typically "inside the main text," while outer themes install templates for elements "around the main text." Thus, from the templates's point of view, there is no real difference between inner and outer themes.

15.1

Inner Themes

An inner theme installs templates that dictate how the following elements are typeset: · Title and part pages. · Itemize environments. · Enumerate environments. · Description environments. · Block environments. · Theorem and proof environments. · Figures and tables. · Footnotes. · Bibliography entries. In the following examples, the color themes seahorse and rose are used to show where and how background colors are honoured. Furthermore, background colors have been specified for all elements that honour them in the default theme. In the default color theme, all of the large rectangular areas are transparent. \useinnertheme{default} Example:
There Is No Largest Prime Number
The proof uses reductio ad absurdum.

There Is No Largest Prime Number
With an introduction to a new proof technique

Theorem
There is no largest prime number.

Euklid of Alexandria
Depar tment of Mathematics University of Alexandria

Proof.
1. Suppose p were the largest prime number. 2. Let q be the product of the first p numbers. 3. Then q + 1 is not divisible by any of them. 4. Thus q + 1 is also prime and greater than p.

27th International Symposium on Prime Numbers, 280

The default element theme is quite sober. The only extravagance is the fact that a little triangle is used in itemize environments instead of the usual dot. In some cases the theme will honour background color specifications for elements. For example, if you set the background color for block titles to green, block titles will have a green background. The background specifications are currently honoured for the following elements: · Title, author, institute, and date fields in the title page. 139

· Block environments, both for the title and for the body. This list may increase in the future. \useinnertheme{circles} Example:
There Is No Largest Prime Number
The proof uses reductio ad absurdum.

There Is No Largest Prime Number
With an introduction to a new proof technique

Theorem
Euklid of Alexandria
Depar tment of Mathematics University of Alexandria

There is no largest prime number.

Proof.
1

Suppose p were the largest prime number. Let q be the product of the first p numbers. Then q + 1 is not divisible by any of them. Thus q + 1 is also prime and greater than p.

27th International Symposium on Prime Numbers, 280

2 3 4

1 Results

Proof of the Main Theorem

In this theme, itemize and enumerate items start with a small circle. Likewise, entries in the table of contents start with circles. \useinnertheme{rectangles} Example:
There Is No Largest Prime Number
The proof uses reductio ad absurdum.

There Is No Largest Prime Number
With an introduction to a new proof technique

Theorem
Euklid of Alexandria
Depar tment of Mathematics University of Alexandria

There is no largest prime number.

Proof.
1

Suppose p were the largest prime number. Let q be the product of the first p numbers. Then q + 1 is not divisible by any of them. Thus q + 1 is also prime and greater than p.

27th International Symposium on Prime Numbers, 280

2 3 4

1

Results Proof of the Main Theorem

In this theme, itemize and enumerate items and table of contents entries start with small rectangles. \useinnertheme[ options ]{rounded} Example:
There Is No Largest Prime Number
The proof uses reductio ad absurdum.

There Is No Largest Prime Number
With an introduction to a new proof technique

Theorem
Euklid of Alexandria
Depar tment of Mathematics University of Alexandria

There is no largest prime number.

Proof.
1

Suppose p were the largest prime number. Let q be the product of the first p numbers. Then q + 1 is not divisible by any of them. Thus q + 1 is also prime and greater than p.

27th International Symposium on Prime Numbers, 280

2 3 4

1

Results Proof of the Main Theorem

140

In this theme, itemize and enumerate items and table of contents entries start with small balls. If a background is specified for blocks, then the corners of the background rectangles will be rounded off. The following options may be given: · shadow adds a shadow to all blocks. \useinnertheme{inmargin} Example:
There Is No Largest Prime Number There Is No Largest Prime Number
With an introduction to a new proof technique
The proof uses reductio ad absurdum.

Who? From? When?

Euklid of Alexandria
Depar tment of Mathematics University of Alexandria

Theorem Proof.
1. 2. 3. 4.

There is no largest prime number.

27th International Symposium on Prime Numbers, 280

Suppose p were the largest prime number. Let q be the product of the first p numbers. Then q + 1 is not divisible by any of them. Thus q + 1 is also prime and greater than p.

Results Proof of the Main Theorem

The idea behind this theme is to have "structuring" information on the left and "normal" information on the right. To this end, blocks are redefined such that the block title is shown on the left and the block body is shown on the right. The code used to place text in the margin is a bit fragile. You may often need to adjust the spacing "by hand," so use at your own risk. Itemize items are redefined such that they appear on the left. However, only the position is changed by changing some spacing parameters; the code used to draw the items is not changed otherwise. Because of this, you can load another inner theme first and then load this theme afterwards. This theme is a "dirty" an inner theme since it messes with things that an inner theme should not mess with. In particular, it changes the width of the left sidebar to a large value. However, you can still use it together with most outer themes. Using columns inside this theme is problematic. Most of the time, the result will not be what you expect.

15.2

Outer Themes

An outer theme dictates (roughly) the overall layout of frames. It specifies where any navigational elements should go (like a mini table of contents or navigational mini frames) and what they should look like. Typically, an outer theme specifies how the following elements are rendered: · The head- and footline. · The sidebars. · The logo. · The frame title. An outer theme will not specify how things like itemize environments should be rendered--that is the job of an inner theme. In the following examples the color theme seahorse is used. Since the default color theme leaves most backgrounds empty, most of the outer themes look too unstructured with the default color theme. \useoutertheme{default} Example:

141

There Is No Largest Prime Number
The proof uses reductio ad absurdum.

There Is No Largest Prime Number
With an introduction to a new proof technique

Theorem
Euklid of Alexandria
Depar tment of Mathematics University of Alexandria

There is no largest prime number.

Proof.
1. Suppose p were the largest prime number. 2. Let q be the product of the first p numbers. 3. Then q + 1 is not divisible by any of them. 4. Thus q + 1 is also prime and greater than p.

27th International Symposium on Prime Numbers, 280

Results Proof of the Main Theorem

The default layout theme is the most sober and minimalistic theme around. It will flush left the frame title and it will not install any head- or footlines. However, even this theme honours the background color specified for the frame title. If a color is specified, a bar occupying the whole page width is put behind the frame title. A background color of the frame subtitle is ignored. \useoutertheme{infolines} Example:
Results Proof of the Main Theorem

There Is No Largest Prime Number
The proof uses reductio ad absurdum.

There Is No Largest Prime Number
With an introduction to a new proof technique

Theorem
Euklid of Alexandria
Depar tment of Mathematics University of Alexandria

There is no largest prime number.

Proof.
1. Suppose p were the largest prime number. 2. Let q be the product of the first p numbers. 3. Then q + 1 is not divisible by any of them. 4. Thus q + 1 is also prime and greater than p.

27th International Symposium on Prime Numbers, 280

Results Proof of the Main Theorem

Euklid (Univ. Alexandria)

There Is No Largest Prime Number

ISPN '80

1/2

Euklid (Univ. Alexandria)

There Is No Largest Prime Number

ISPN '80

2/2

This theme installs a headline showing the current section and the current subsection. It installs a footline showing the author's name, the institution, the presentation's title, the current date, and a frame count. This theme uses only little space. The colors used in the headline and footline are drawn from palette primary, palette secondary, and primary tertiary (see Section 16 for details on how to change these). \useoutertheme[ options ]{miniframes} Example:
Results Results Proof of the Main Theorem

There Is No Largest Prime Number
The proof uses reductio ad absurdum.

There Is No Largest Prime Number
With an introduction to a new proof technique

Theorem
Euklid of Alexandria
Depar tment of Mathematics University of Alexandria

There is no largest prime number.

Proof.
1. Suppose p were the largest prime number. 2. Let q be the product of the first p numbers. 3. Then q + 1 is not divisible by any of them. 4. Thus q + 1 is also prime and greater than p.

27th International Symposium on Prime Numbers, 280

Results Proof of the Main Theorem

142

This theme installs a headline in which a horizontal navigational bar is shown. This bar contains one entry for each section of the presentation. Below each section entry, small circles are shown that represent the different frames in the section. The frames are arranged subsection-wise, that is, there is a line of frames for each subsection. If the class option compress is given, the frames will instead be arranged in a single row for each section. The navigation bars draws its color from section in head/foot. Below the navigation bar, a line is put showing the title of the current subsection. The color is drawn from subsection in head/foot. At the bottom, two lines are put that contain information such as the author's name, the institution, or the paper's title. What is shown exactly is influenced by the options given. The colors are drawn from the appropriate beamer-colors like author in head/foot. At the top and bottom of both the head- and footline and between the navigation bar and the subsection name, separation lines are drawn if the background color of separation line is set. This separation line will have a height of 3pt. You can get even more fine-grained control over the colors of the separation lines by setting appropriate colors like lower separation line head. The following options can be given: · footline=empty suppressed the footline (default). · footline=authorinstitute shows the author's name and the institute in the footline. · footline=authortitle shows the author's name and the title in the footline. · footline=institutetitle shows the institute and the title in the footline. · footline=authorinstitutetitle shows the author's name, the institute, and the title in the footline. · subsection= true or false shows or suppresses line showing the subsection in the headline. It is shown by default. \useoutertheme[ options ]{smoothbars} Example:
Results Results Proof of the Main Theorem

There Is No Largest Prime Number
The proof uses reductio ad absurdum.

There Is No Largest Prime Number
With an introduction to a new proof technique

Theorem
There is no largest prime number. Euklid of Alexandria

Proof.
Depar tment of Mathematics University of Alexandria

1. Suppose p were the largest prime number. 2. Let q be the product of the first p numbers. 3. Then q + 1 is not divisible by any of them. 4. Thus q + 1 is also prime and greater than p.

27th International Symposium on Prime Numbers, 280

Results Proof of the Main Theorem

This theme behaves very much like the miniframes theme, at least with respect to the headline. There, the only difference is the smooth transitions are installed between the background colors of the navigation bar, the (optional) bar for the subsection name, and the background of the frame title. No footline is created. You can get the footlines of the miniframes theme by first loading the theme and then loading the smoothbars theme. The following options can be given: · subsection= true or false shows or suppresses line showing the subsection in the headline. It is shown by default. \useoutertheme[ options ]{sidebar} Example:

143

There Is No Largest Prime Number
The proof uses reductio ad absurdum.
There Is No Largest Prime Number Euklid Results
Proof of the Main Theorem

There Is No Largest Prime Number

There Is No Largest Prime Number
With an introduction to a new proof technique

Euklid Results
Proof of the Main Theorem

Theorem
There is no largest prime number.

Euklid of Alexandria
Depar tment of Mathematics University of Alexandria

Proof.
1. Suppose p were the largest prime number. 2. Let q be the product of the first p numbers. 3. Then q + 1 is not divisible by any of them. 4. Thus q + 1 is also prime and greater than p.

27th International Symposium on Prime Numbers, 280 Results Proof of the Main Theorem

In this layout, a sidebar is shown subsection, or subsection hilighted. top that always occupies the same "corner" resulting from the sidebar

that contains a small table of contents with the current section, The frame title is vertically centered in a rectangular area at the amount of space in all frames. Finally, the logo is shown in the and the frame title rectangle.

There are several ways of modifying the layout using the options . If you set the width of the sidebar to 0pt, it is not shown, giving you a layout in which the frame title does not "wobble" since it always occupies the same amount of space on all slides. Conversely, if you set the height of the frame title rectangle to 0pt, the rectangular area is not used and the frame title is inserted normally (occupying as much space as needed on each slide). The background color of the sidebar is taken from sidebar, the background color of the frame title from frametitle, and the background color of the logo corner from logo. The colors of the entries in the table of contents are drawn from the beamer-color section in sidebar and section in sidebar current as well as the corresponding beamer-colors for subsections. If an entry does not fit on a single line it is automatically "linebroken." The following options may be given: · height= dimension specifies the height of the frame title rectangle. If it is set to 0pt, no frame title rectangle is created. Instead, the frame title is inserted normally into the frame. The default is 2.5 base line heights of the frame title font. Thus, there is about enough space for a two-line frame title plus a one-line subtitle. · hideothersubsections causes all subsections except those of the current section to be suppressed in the table of contents. This is useful if you have lots of subsections. · hideallsubsections causes all subsections to be suppressed in the table of contents. · left puts the sidebar on the left side. Note that in a left-to-right reading culture this is the side people look first. Note also that this table of contents is usually not the most important part of the frame, so you do not necessarily want people to look at it first. Nevertheless, it is the default. · right puts the sidebar of the right side. · width= dimension specifies the width of the sidebar. If it is set to 0pt, it is completely suppressed. The default is 2.5 base line heights of the frame title font. \useoutertheme{split} Example:

144

Results

Results

Proof of the Main Theorem

There Is No Largest Prime Number
The proof uses reductio ad absurdum.

There Is No Largest Prime Number
With an introduction to a new proof technique

Theorem
Euklid of Alexandria
Depar tment of Mathematics University of Alexandria

There is no largest prime number.

Proof.
1. Suppose p were the largest prime number. 2. Let q be the product of the first p numbers. 3. Then q + 1 is not divisible by any of them. 4. Thus q + 1 is also prime and greater than p.

27th International Symposium on Prime Numbers, 280

Results Proof of the Main Theorem

Euklid

There Is No Largest Prime Number

Euklid

There Is No Largest Prime Number

This theme installs a headline in which, on the left, the sections of the talk are shown and, on the right, the subsections of the current section. If the class option compress has been given, the sections and subsections will be put in one line; normally there is one line per section or subsection. The footline shows the author on the left and the talk's title on the right. The colors are taken from palette primary and palette fourth. \useoutertheme{shadow} Example:
Results Results Proof of the Main Theorem

There Is No Largest Prime Number
The proof uses reductio ad absurdum.

There Is No Largest Prime Number
With an introduction to a new proof technique

Theorem
There is no largest prime number. Euklid of Alexandria

Proof.
Depar tment of Mathematics University of Alexandria

1. Suppose p were the largest prime number. 2. Let q be the product of the first p numbers. 3. Then q + 1 is not divisible by any of them. 4. Thus q + 1 is also prime and greater than p.

27th International Symposium on Prime Numbers, 280

Results Proof of the Main Theorem

Euklid

There Is No Largest Prime Number

Euklid

There Is No Largest Prime Number

This layout theme extends the split theme by putting a horizontal shading behind the frame title and adding a little "shadow" at the bottom of the headline. \useoutertheme[ options ]{tree} Example:
There Is No Largest Prime Number There Is No Largest Prime Number Results Proof of the Main Theorem

There Is No Largest Prime Number
The proof uses reductio ad absurdum.

There Is No Largest Prime Number
With an introduction to a new proof technique

Theorem
Euklid of Alexandria
Depar tment of Mathematics University of Alexandria

There is no largest prime number.

Proof.
1. Suppose p were the largest prime number. 2. Let q be the product of the first p numbers. 3. Then q + 1 is not divisible by any of them. 4. Thus q + 1 is also prime and greater than p.

27th International Symposium on Prime Numbers, 280

Results Proof of the Main Theorem

145

In this layout, the headline contains three lines that show the title of the current talk, the current section in this talk, and the current subsection in the section. The colors are drawn from title in head/foot, section in head/foot, and subsection in head/foot. In addition, separation lines of height 3pt are shown above and below the three lines if the background of separation line is set. More fine-grained control of the colors of these lines can be gained by setting upper separation line head and lower separation line head. The following options may be given: · hooks causes little "hooks" to be drawn in front of the section and subsection entries. These are supposed to increase the tree-like appearance. \useoutertheme{smoothtree} Example:
There Is No Largest Prime Number There Is No Largest Prime Number Results Proof of the Main Theorem

There Is No Largest Prime Number
The proof uses reductio ad absurdum.

There Is No Largest Prime Number
With an introduction to a new proof technique

Theorem
There is no largest prime number. Euklid of Alexandria

Proof.
Depar tment of Mathematics University of Alexandria

1. Suppose p were the largest prime number. 2. Let q be the product of the first p numbers. 3. Then q + 1 is not divisible by any of them. 4. Thus q + 1 is also prime and greater than p.

27th International Symposium on Prime Numbers, 280

Results Proof of the Main Theorem

This layout is similar to the tree layout. The main difference is that the background colors change smoothly.

15.3

Changing the Templates Used for Different Elements of a Presentation

This section explains how beamer's template management works. 15.3.1 Overview of Beamer's Template Management

If you only wish to modify the appearance of a single or few elements, you do not need to create a whole new inner or outer theme. Instead, you can modify the appropriate template. A template specifies how an element of a presentation is typeset. For example, the frametitle template dictates where the frame title is put, which font is used, and so on. A As the name suggests, you specify a template by writing the exact L TEX code you would also use when typesetting a single frame title by hand. Only, instead of the actual title, you use the command \insertframetitle. Example: Suppose we would like to have the frame title typeset in red, centered, and boldface. If we were to typeset a single frame title by hand, it might be done like this:
\begin{frame} \begin{centering} \color{red} \textbf{The Title of This Frame.} \par \end{centering} Blah, blah. \end{frame}

In order to typeset the frame title in this way on all slides, in the simplest case we can change the frame title template as follows:

146

\setbeamertemplate{frametitle} { \begin{centering} \color{red} \textbf{\insertframetitle} \par \end{centering} }

We can then use the following code to get the desired effect:
\begin{frame} \frametitle{The Title of This Frame.} Blah, blah. \end{frame}

When rendering the frame, beamer will use the code of the frame title template to typeset the frame title and it will replace every occurrence of \insertframetitle by the current frame title. We can take this example a step further. It would be nicer if we did not have to "hardwire" the color of the frametitle, but if this color could be specified independently of the code for the template. This way, a color theme could change this color. Since this a problem that is common to most templates, beamer will automatically setup the beamer-color frametitle when the template frametitle is used. Thus, we can remove the \color{red} command if we set the beamer-color frametitle to red at some point.
\setbeamercolor{frametitle}{fg=red} \setbeamertemplate{frametitle} { \begin{centering} \textbf{\insertframetitle} \par \end{centering} }

Next, we can also make the font "themable." Just like the color, the beamer-font frametitle is installed before the frametitle template is typeset. Thus, we should rewrite the code as follows:
\setbeamercolor{frametitle}{fg=red} \setbeamerfont{frametitle}{series=\bfseries} \setbeamertemplate{frametitle} { \begin{centering} \insertframetitle\par \end{centering} }

Users, themes, or whoever can now easily change the color or font of the frametitle without having to mess with the code used to typeset it. article In article mode, most of the template mechanism is switched off and has no effect. However, a few templates are also available. If this is the case, it is specially indicated. Here are a few hints that might be helpful when you wish to set a template: · Usually, you might wish to copy code from an existing template. The code often takes care of some things that you may not yet have thought about. The default inner and outer themes might be useful starting points. Also, the file beamerbaseauxtemplates.sty contains interesting "auxilliary" templates. · When copying code from another template and when inserting this code in the preamble of your document (not in another style file), you may have to "switch on" the at-character (@). To do so, add the command \makeatletter before the \setbeamertemplate command and the command \makeatother afterward. · Most templates having to do with the frame components (headlines, sidebars, etc.) can only be changed in the preamble. Other templates can be changed during the document. 147

· The height of the headline and footline templates is calculated automatically. This is done by typesetting the templates and then "having a look" at their heights. This recalculation is done right at the beginning of the document, after all packages have been loaded and even after these have executed their \AtBeginDocument initialization. · Getting the boxes right inside any template is often a bit of a hassle. You may wish to consult the TEX book for the glorious details on "Making Boxes." If your headline is simple, you might also try putting everything into a pgfpicture environment, which makes the placement easier. 15.3.2 Using Beamer's Templates

As a user of the beamer class you typically do not "use" or "invoke" templates yourself, directly. For example, the frame title template is automatically invoked by beamer somewhere deep inside the frame typesetting process. The same is true of most other templates. However, if, for whatever reason, you wish to invoke a template yourself, you can use the following command. \usebeamertemplate***{ element name } If none of the stars is given, the text of the element name is directly inserted at the current position. This text should previously have been specified using the \setbeamertemplate command. No text is inserted if this command has not been called before. Example:
\setbeamertemplate{my template}{correct} ... Your answer is \usebeamertemplate{my template}.

If you add one star, three things happen. First, the template is put inside a TEX-group, thereby limiting most side effects of commands used inside the template. Second, inside this group the beamer-color named element name is used and the foreground color is selected. Third, the beamer-font element name is also used. This one-starred version is usually the best version to use. If you add a second star, nearly the same happens as with only one star. Howe is used with the command \setbeamercolor*. This causes the colors to be color if no special foreground or background is specified by the beamer-color this twice-starred version, the color used for the template is guaranteed to be that was currently in use when the template is used. ver, in addition, the color reset to the normal text element name . Thus, in independent of the color

Finally, adding a third star will also cause a star to be added to the \setbeamerfont* command. This causes the font used for the template also to be reset to normal text, unless the beamer-font element name specifies things differently. This three-star version is the "most protected" version available. \ifbeamertemplateempty{ beamer template name }{ executed if empty }{ executed otherwise } This command checks whether a template is defined and set to a non-empty text. If the text is empty or the template is not defined at all, executed if empty is executed. Otherwise, executed otherwise is executed. \expandbeamertemplate{ beamer template name } This command does the same as \usebeamertemplate{ beamer template name }. The difference is that this command performs a direct expansion and does not scan for a star. This is important inside, for example, an \edef. If you don't know the difference between \def and \edef, you won't need this command. 15.3.3 Setting Beamer's Templates

To set a beamer-template, you can use the following command: \setbeamertemplate{ element name }[ predefined option ] args In the simplest case, if no predefined option is given, the args must be a single argument and the text of the template element name is setup to be this text. Upon later invocation of the template by the command \usebeamertemplate this text is used. Example:

148

\setbeamertemplate{answer}{correct} ... Your answer is \usebeamertemplate*{answer}.

If you specify a predefined option , this command behaves slightly differently. In this case, someone has used the command \defbeamertemplate to predefined a template for you. By giving the name of this predefined template as the optional parameter predefined option , you cause the template element name to be set to this template. Example: \setbeamertemplate{bibliography item}[book] causes the bibliography items to become little book icons. This command cause a subsequent call of \usebeamertemplate{bibliography item} to insert the predefined code for inserting a book. Some predefined template options take parameters themselves. In such a case, the parameters are given as args . Example: The predefined option grid for the template background takes an optional argument:
\setbeamertemplate{background}[grid][step=1cm]

In the example, the second argument in square brackets is the optional argument. In the descriptions of elements, if there are possible predefined option , the description shows how the predefined option can be used together with its arguments, but the \setbeamertemplate{xxxx} is omitted. Thus, the above example would be documented in the description of the background element like this: · [grid][ step options ] causes a light grid to be . . . \addtobeamertemplate{ element name }{ pre-text }{ post-text } This command adds the pre-text before the text that is currently installed as the template element name and the post-text after it. This allows you a limited form of modification of existing templates. Example: The following commands have the same effect:
\setbeamertemplate{my template}{Hello world!} \setbeamertemplate{my template}{world} \addtobeamertemplate{my template}{Hello }{!}

If a new template is installed, any additions will be deleted. On the other hand, you can repeatedly use this command to add multiple things. \defbeamertemplate< mode specification >*{ element name }{ predefined option } [ argument number ][ default optional argument ]{ predefined text } [action]{ action command } This command installs a predefined option for the template element name . Once this command has been used, users can access the predefined template using the \setbeamertemplate command. Example: \defbeamertemplate{itemize item}{double arrow}{$\Rightarrow$} After the above command has been invoked, the following two commands will have the same effect:
\setbeamertemplate{itemize item}{$\Rightarrow$} \setbeamertemplate{itemize item}[double arrow]

Sometimes, a predefined template needs to get an argument when it is installed. Suppose, for example, we want to define a predefined template that draws a square as the itemize item and we want to make this size of this square configurable. In this case, we can specify the argument number of the predefined option the same way one does for the \newcommand command:
\defbeamertemplate{itemize item}{square}[1]{\hrule width #1 height #1} % The following have the same effect: \setbeamertemplate{itemize item}[square]{3pt} \setbeamertemplate{itemize item}{\hrule width 3pt height 3pt}

149

As for the \newcommand command, you can also specify a default optional argument :
\defbeamertemplate{itemize item}{square}[1][1ex]{\hrule width #1 height #1} % The following have the same effect: \setbeamertemplate{itemize item}[square][3pt] \setbeamertemplate{itemize item}{\hrule width 3pt height 3pt} % So do the following: \setbeamertemplate{itemize item}[square] \setbeamertemplate{itemize item}{\hrule width 1ex height 1ex}

The starred version of the command installs the predefined template option, but then immediately calls \setbeamertemplate for this option. This is useful for the default templates. If there are any arguments necessary, these are set to \relax. In certain cases, if a predefined template option is chosen, you do not only wish the template text to be installed, but certain extra "actions" must also be taken once. For example, a shading must be defined that should not be redefined every time the shading is used later on. To implement such "actions," you can use the optional argument action following the keyword [action]. Thus, after the normal use of the \defbeamertemplate you add the text [action] and then any commands that should be executed once when the predefined option is selected by the \setbeamertemplate command. Example:
\defbeamertemplate{background canvas}{my shading}[2] { \pgfuseshading{myshading}% simple enough } [action] { \pgfdeclareverticalshading{myshading}{\the\paperwidth} {color(0cm)=(#1); color(\the\paperheight)=(#2)} } ... \setbeamertemplate{background canvas}{myshading}{red!10}{blue!10} % Defines the shading myshading right here. Subsequent calls to % \usebeamertemplate{background canvas} will yield % ``\pgfuseshading{myshading}''.

article Normally, this command has no effect in article mode. However, if a mode specification is given, this command is applied for the specified modes. Thus, this command behaves like the \\ command, which also gets the implicit mode specification if no other specification is given. Example: \defbeamertemplate{my template}{default}{something} has no effect in article mode. Example: \defbeamertemplate

{my template}{default}{something} has no effect in presentation modes, but has an effect in article mode. Example: \defbeamertemplate{my template}{default}{something} applies to all modes. It is often useful to have access to the same template option via different names. For this, you can use the following command to create aliases: \defbeamertemplatealias{ element name }{ new predefined option name }{ existing predefined option name } Causes the two predefined options to have the same effect. There is no inheritance relation among templates as there is for colors and fonts. This is due to the fact the templates for one element seldom make sense for another. However, sometimes certain elements "behave similarly" and one would like a \setbeamertemplate to apply to a whole set of templates via inheritance. For example, one might want that \setbeamertemplate{items}[circle] causes all items to use the circle option, though the effects for the itemize item as opposed to the itemize subsubitem as opposed to enumerate item must be slightly different. The beamer-template mechanism implements a simple form of inheritance via parent templates. In element descriptions, parent templates are indicated via a check mark in parentheses. 150

\defbeamertemplateparent{ parent template name }[ predefined option name ]{ child template list } [ argument number ][ default optional argument ]{ arguments for children } The effect of this command is that whenever someone calls \setbeamertemplate{ parent template name }{ args }, the command \setbeamertemplate{ child template name }{ args } is called for each child template name in the child template list . The arguments for children come into play if the \setbeamertemplate command is called with a predefined option name (not necessarily the same as the predefined option name , we'll come to that). If \setbeamertemplate is called with some predefined option name, the children are called with the arguments for children instead. Let's look at two examples: Example: The following is the typical, simple usage:
\defbeamertemplateparent{itemize items}{itemize item,itemize subitem,itemize subsubitem} {} % The following command has the same effect as the three commands below: \setbeamertemplate{itemize items}[circle] \setbeamertemplate{itemite item}[circle] % actually, the ``empty'' argument is added \setbeamertemplate{itemize subitem}[circle] \setbeamertemplate{itemize subsubitem}[circle]

Example: In the following case, an argument is passed to the children:
\defbeamertemplateparent{sections/subsections in toc shaded} {section in toc shaded,subsection in toc shaded}[1][20] {[#1]} % The following command has the same effect as the two commands below: \setbeamertemplate{sections/subsection in toc shaded}[default][35] \setbeamertemplate{section in toc shaded}[default][35] \setbeamertemplate{subsection in toc shaded}[default][35]

% Again: \setbeamertemplate{sections/subsection in toc shaded}[default] \setbeamertemplate{section in toc shaded}[default][20] \setbeamertemplate{subsection in toc shaded}[default][20]

In detail, the following happens: When \setbeamertemplate is encountered for a parent template, beamer first checks whether a predefined option follows. If not, a single argument is read and \setbeamertemplate is called for all children for this template. If there is a predefined template option set, beamer evaluates the argument for children . It may contain parameters like #1 or #2. These parameters are filled with the arguments that follow the call of \setbeamertemplate for the parent template. The number of arguments must be the number given as argument number . An optional argument can also be specified in the usual way. Once the arguments for the children have been computed, \setbeamertemplate is called for all children for the predefined template and with the computed arguments. You may wonder what happens when certain predefined options take a certain number of arguments, but another predefined option takes a different number of arguments. In this case, the above-described mechanism cannot differentiate between the predefined options and it is unclear which or even how many arguments should be contained in arguments for children . For this reason, you can give the optional argument predefined option name when calling \defbeamertemplateparent. If this optional argument is specified, the parenthood of the template applies only to this particular predefined option name . Thus, if someone calls \setbeamertemplate for this predefined option name , the given argument for children is used. For other predefined option names a possibly different definition is used. You can imaging that leaving out the optional predefined option name means "this argument for children applies to all predefined option names that have not been specially defined differently."

151

16

Colors

beamer's color management allows you to specify the color of every element (like, say, the color of the section entries in a table of contents or, say, the color of the subsection entries in a mini table of contents in a sidebar). While the system is quite powerful, it is not trivial to use. To simplify the usage of the color system, you should consider using a predefined color theme, which takes care of everything for you. In the following, color themes are explained first. The rest of the section consists of explanations of how the color management works internally. You will need to read these sections only if you wish to write your own color themes; or if you are quite happy with the predefined themes but you absolutely insist that displayed mathematical text simply has to be typeset in a lovely pink.

16.1

Color Themes

In order to also show the effect of the different color themes on the sidebar, in the following examples the color themes are used together with the outer theme sidebar. 16.1.1 Default and Sp ecial-Purp ose Color Themes

\usecolortheme{default} Example:
There Is No Largest Prime Number Euklid Results
Proof of the Main Theorem

There Is No Largest Prime Number Euklid

There Is No Largest Prime Number
The proof uses reductio ad absurdum.

There Is No Largest Prime Number
With an introduction to a new proof technique

Results
Proof of the Main Theorem

Theorem
Euklid of Alexandria
Depar tment of Mathematics University of Alexandria

There is no largest prime number.

Proof.
1. Suppose p were the largest prime number. 2. Let q be the product of the first p numbers. 3. Then q + 1 is not divisible by any of them. 4. Thus q + 1 is also prime and greater than p. Results Proof of the Main Theorem

27th International Symposium on Prime Numbers, 280

The default color theme is very sober. It installs little special colors and even less backgrounds. The default color theme sets up the default parent relations between the different beamer-colors. The main colors set in the default color theme are the following: · normal text is black on white. · alerted text is red. · example text is a dark green (green with 50% black). · structure is set to a light version of MidnightBlue (more precisely, 20% red, 20% green, and 70% blue). Use this theme for a no-nonsense presentation. Since this theme is loaded by default, you cannot "reload" it after having loaded another color theme. \usecolortheme[ options ]{structure} Example:

152

There Is No Largest Prime Number Euklid Results
Proof of the Main Theorem

There Is No Largest Prime Number Euklid

There Is No Largest Prime Number
The proof uses reductio ad absurdum.

There Is No Largest Prime Number
With an introduction to a new proof technique

Results
Proof of the Main Theorem

Theorem
Euklid of Alexandria
Depar tment of Mathematics University of Alexandria

There is no largest prime number.

Proof.
1. Suppose p were the largest prime number. 2. Let q be the product of the first p numbers. 3. Then q + 1 is not divisible by any of them. 4. Thus q + 1 is also prime and greater than p.

27th International Symposium on Prime Numbers, 280

Results Proof of the Main Theorem

The example was created using \usecolortheme[named=SeaGreen]{structure}. This theme offers a convenient way of changing the color used for structural elements. More precisely, it just changes the foreground of the beamer-color structure. You can also achieve this by directly invoking the function \setbeamercolor, but this color theme makes things a bit easier. The theme offers several options , which can be used to specify the color to be used for structural elements: · rgb={ rgb tuple } sets the structure foreground to the specified red-green-blue tuple. The numbers are given as decimals between 0 and 1. For example, rgb={0.5,0,0} yields a dark red. · RGB={ rgb tuple } does the same as rgb, except that the numbers range between 0 and 255. For example, RGB={128,0,0} yields a dark red. · cmyk={ cymk tuple } sets the structure foreground to the specified cyan-magenta-yellow-black tuple. The numbers are given as decimals between 0 and 1. For example, cymk={0,1,1,0.5} yields a dark red. · cmy={ cym tuple } is similar to cmyk, except that the black component is not specified. · hsb={ hsb tuple } sets the structure foreground to the specified hue-saturation-brightness tuple. The numbers are given as decimals between 0 and 1. For example, hsb={0,1,.5} yields a dark red. · named={ color name } sets the structure foreground to a named color. This color must previously have been defined using the \DefineNamedColor command. Adding the class option xcolor=dvipsnames will install a long list of standard names. See the file dvipsnam.def for the list. \usecolortheme{sidebartab} Example:
There Is No Largest Prime Number Euklid Results
Proof of the Main Theorem

There Is No Largest Prime Number Euklid

There Is No Largest Prime Number
The proof uses reductio ad absurdum.

There Is No Largest Prime Number
With an introduction to a new proof technique

Results
Proof of the Main Theorem

Theorem
Euklid of Alexandria
Depar tment of Mathematics University of Alexandria

There is no largest prime number.

Proof.
1. Suppose p were the largest prime number. 2. Let q be the product of the first p numbers. 3. Then q + 1 is not divisible by any of them. 4. Thus q + 1 is also prime and greater than p.

27th International Symposium on Prime Numbers, 280

Results Proof of the Main Theorem

This theme changes the colors in a sidebar such that the current entry in a table of contents shown there gets hilighted by showing a different background behind it.

153

16.1.2

Complete Color Themes

A "complete" color theme is a color theme that completely specifies all colors for all parts of a frame. It installs specific colors and does not derive the colors from, say, the structure beamer-color. Complete color themes happen to have names of flying animals. \usecolortheme{albatross} Example:
There Is No Largest Prime Number Euklid Results
Proof of the Main Theorem

There Is No Largest Prime Number Euklid

There Is No Largest Prime Number
The proof uses reductio ad absurdum.

There Is No Largest Prime Number
With an introduction to a new proof technique

Results
Proof of the Main Theorem

Theorem
There is no largest prime number.

Euklid of Alexandria
Depar tment of Mathematics University of Alexandria

Proof.
1. Suppose p were the largest prime number. 2. Let q be the product of the first p numbers. 3. Then q + 1 is not divisible by any of them. 4. Thus q + 1 is also prime and greater than p.

27th International Symposium on Prime Numbers, 280

Results Proof of the Main Theorem

The color theme is a "dark" or "inverted" theme using yellow on blue as the main colors. The color theme also installs a slightly darker background color for blocks, which is necessary for presentation themes that use shadows, but which (in my opinion) is undesirable for all other presentation themes. By using the lily color theme together with this theme, the backgrounds for blocks can be removed. When using a light-on-dark theme like this one, be aware that there are certain disadvantages: · If the room in which the talk is given has been "darkened," using such a theme makes it more difficult for the audience to take or read notes. · Since the room becomes darker, the pupil becomes larger, thus making it harder for the eye to focus. This can make text harder to read. · Printing such slides is difficult at best. On the other hand, a light-on-dark presentation often appears to be more "stylish" than a plain blackon-white one. The following options may be given: · overlystylish installs a background canvas that is, in my opinion, way too stylish. But then, I do not want to press my taste on other people. When using this option, it is probably a very good idea to also use the lily color theme. Example: The overlystylish option together with the lily color theme:
There Is No Largest Prime Number Euklid Results
Proof of the Main Theorem

There Is No Largest Prime Number Euklid

There Is No Largest Prime Number
The proof uses reductio ad absurdum.

There Is No Largest Prime Number
With an introduction to a new proof technique

Results
Proof of the Main Theorem

Theorem
Euklid of Alexandria
Depar tment of Mathematics University of Alexandria

There is no largest prime number.

Proof.
1. Suppose p were the largest prime number. 2. Let q be the product of the first p numbers. 3. Then q + 1 is not divisible by any of them. 4. Thus q + 1 is also prime and greater than p. Results Proof of the Main Theorem

27th International Symposium on Prime Numbers, 280

154

\usecolortheme{beetle} Example:
There Is No Largest Prime Number Euklid Results
Proof of the Main Theorem

There Is No Largest Prime Number Euklid

There Is No Largest Prime Number
The proof uses reductio ad absurdum.

There Is No Largest Prime Number
With an introduction to a new proof technique

Results
Proof of the Main Theorem

Theorem
Euklid of Alexandria
Depar tment of Mathematics University of Alexandria

There is no largest prime number.

Proof.
1. Suppose p were the largest prime number. 2. Let q be the product of the first p numbers. 3. Then q + 1 is not divisible by any of them. 4. Thus q + 1 is also prime and greater than p. Results Proof of the Main Theorem

27th International Symposium on Prime Numbers, 280

The main "theme behing this theme" is to use white and black text on gray background. The white text is used for special emphasis, the black text for normal text. The "outer stuff " like the headline and the footline use, however, a bluish color. To change this color, change the background of palette primary. Great care must be taken with this theme since both the white/gray and the black/gray contrasts are much lower than with other themes. Make sure that the contrast is high enough for the actual presentation. You can change the "grayish" background by changing the background of normal text. \usecolortheme{crane} Example:
There Is No Largest Prime Number Euklid Results
Proof of the Main Theorem

There Is No Largest Prime Number Euklid

There Is No Largest Prime Number
The proof uses reductio ad absurdum.

There Is No Largest Prime Number
With an introduction to a new proof technique

Results
Proof of the Main Theorem

Theorem
Euklid of Alexandria
Depar tment of Mathematics University of Alexandria

There is no largest prime number.

Proof.
1. Suppose p were the largest prime number.

27th International Symposium on Prime Numbers, 280

2. Let q be the product of the first p numbers. 3. Then q + 1 is not divisible by any of them. 4. Thus q + 1 is also prime and greater than p.

Results Proof of the Main Theorem

This theme uses the colors of the Lufthansa, whose logo is a crane. It is not an official theme by that company, however. \usecolortheme{dove} Example:

155

There Is No Largest Prime Number Euklid Results
Proof of the Main Theorem

There Is No Largest Prime Number Euklid

There Is No Largest Prime Number
The proof uses reductio ad absurdum.

There Is No Largest Prime Number
With an introduction to a new proof technique

Results
Proof of the Main Theorem

Theorem
Euklid of Alexandria
Depar tment of Mathematics University of Alexandria

There is no largest prime number.

Proof.
1. Suppose p were the largest prime number. 2. Let q be the product of the first p numbers. 3. Then q + 1 is not divisible by any of them. 4. Thus q + 1 is also prime and greater than p. Results Proof of the Main Theorem

27th International Symposium on Prime Numbers, 280

This theme is nearly a black and white theme and useful for creating presentations that are easy to print on a black-and-white printer. The theme uses grayscale in certain unavoidable cases, but never color. It also changes the font of alerted text to boldface. When using this theme, you should consider using the class option gray, which ensures that all colors are converted to grayscale. Also consider using the structurebold font theme. \usecolortheme{fly} Example:
There Is No Largest Prime Number Euklid Results
Proof of the Main Theorem

There Is No Largest Prime Number Euklid

There Is No Largest Prime Number
The proof uses reductio ad absurdum.

There Is No Largest Prime Number
With an introduction to a new proof technique

Results
Proof of the Main Theorem

Theorem
Euklid of Alexandria
Depar tment of Mathematics University of Alexandria

There is no largest prime number.

Proof.
1. Suppose p were the largest prime number. 2. Let q be the product of the first p numbers. 3. Then q + 1 is not divisible by any of them. 4. Thus q + 1 is also prime and greater than p. Results Proof of the Main Theorem

27th International Symposium on Prime Numbers, 280

This theme is the "consequent" version of beetle and uses white/black/gray throughout. It does not go particularly well with themes that use shadows. \usecolortheme{seagull} Example:
There Is No Largest Prime Number Euklid Results
Proof of the Main Theorem

There Is No Largest Prime Number Euklid

There Is No Largest Prime Number
The proof uses reductio ad absurdum.

There Is No Largest Prime Number
With an introduction to a new proof technique

Results
Proof of the Main Theorem

Theorem
There is no largest prime number.

Euklid of Alexandria
Depar tment of Mathematics University of Alexandria

Proof.
1. Suppose p were the largest prime number. 2. Let q be the product of the first p numbers. 3. Then q + 1 is not divisible by any of them. 4. Thus q + 1 is also prime and greater than p.

27th International Symposium on Prime Numbers, 280

Results Proof of the Main Theorem

Like the dove color theme, this theme is useful for printing on a black-and-white printer. However, it uses different shades of gray extensively, which may or may not look good on a transparency. 156

\usecolortheme{wolverine} Example:
There Is No Largest Prime Number Euklid Results
Proof of the Main Theorem

There Is No Largest Prime Number Euklid

There Is No Largest Prime Number
The proof uses reductio ad absurdum.

There Is No Largest Prime Number
With an introduction to a new proof technique

Results
Proof of the Main Theorem

Theorem
Euklid of Alexandria
Depar tment of Mathematics University of Alexandria

There is no largest prime number.

Proof.
1. Suppose p were the largest prime number. 2. Let q be the product of the first p numbers. 3. Then q + 1 is not divisible by any of them. 4. Thus q + 1 is also prime and greater than p.

27th International Symposium on Prime Numbers, 280

Results Proof of the Main Theorem

The theme is based on the colors of the University of Michigan's mascot, a wolverine. Theme author: Madhusudan Singh. \usecolortheme{beaver} Example:
There Is No Largest Prime Number Euklid There Is No Largest Prime Number Euklid

There Is No Largest Prime Number
The proof uses reductio ad absurdum.

There Is No Largest Prime Number
With an introduction to a new proof technique

Theorem
There is no largest prime number.

Euklid of Alexandria
Depar tment of Mathematics University of Alexandria

Proof.
1. Suppose p were the largest prime number. 2. Let q be the product of the first p numbers. 3. Then q + 1 is not divisible by any of them. 4. Thus q + 1 is also prime and greater than p.

27th International Symposium on Prime Numbers, 280

The theme is based on the colors of the MIT's mascot, a beaver. Theme author: Madhusudan Singh. 16.1.3 Inner Color Themes

Inner color themes only specify the colors of elements used in inner themes. Most noticably, they specify the colors used for blocks. They can be used together with other (color) themes. If they are used to change the inner colors installed by a presentation theme or another color theme, they should obviously be specified after the other theme has been loaded. Inner color themes happen to have flower names. \usecolortheme{lily} Example:

157

There Is No Largest Prime Number Euklid Results
Proof of the Main Theorem

There Is No Largest Prime Number Euklid

There Is No Largest Prime Number
The proof uses reductio ad absurdum.

There Is No Largest Prime Number
With an introduction to a new proof technique

Results
Proof of the Main Theorem

Theorem
Euklid of Alexandria
Depar tment of Mathematics University of Alexandria

There is no largest prime number.

Proof.
1. Suppose p were the largest prime number. 2. Let q be the product of the first p numbers. 3. Then q + 1 is not divisible by any of them. 4. Thus q + 1 is also prime and greater than p.

27th International Symposium on Prime Numbers, 280

Results Proof of the Main Theorem

This theme is mainly used to uninstal l any block colors setup by another theme, restoring the colors used in the default theme. In particular, using this theme will remove all background colors for blocks. \usecolortheme{orchid} Example:
There Is No Largest Prime Number Euklid Results
Proof of the Main Theorem

There Is No Largest Prime Number Euklid

There Is No Largest Prime Number
The proof uses reductio ad absurdum.

There Is No Largest Prime Number
With an introduction to a new proof technique

Results
Proof of the Main Theorem

Theorem
There is no largest prime number.

Euklid of Alexandria
Depar tment of Mathematics University of Alexandria

Proof.
1. Suppose p were the largest prime number.

27th International Symposium on Prime Numbers, 280

2. Let q be the product of the first p numbers. 3. Then q + 1 is not divisible by any of them. 4. Thus q + 1 is also prime and greater than p.

Results Proof of the Main Theorem

This theme installs white-on-dark block titles. The background of the title of a normal block is set to the foreground of the structure color, the foreground is set to white. The background of alerted blocks are set to red and of example blocks to green. The body of blocks get a nearly transparent background. \usecolortheme{rose} Example:
There Is No Largest Prime Number Euklid Results
Proof of the Main Theorem

There Is No Largest Prime Number Euklid

There Is No Largest Prime Number
The proof uses reductio ad absurdum.

There Is No Largest Prime Number
With an introduction to a new proof technique

Results
Proof of the Main Theorem

Theorem
There is no largest prime number.

Euklid of Alexandria
Depar tment of Mathematics University of Alexandria

Proof.
1. Suppose p were the largest prime number.

27th International Symposium on Prime Numbers, 280

2. Let q be the product of the first p numbers. 3. Then q + 1 is not divisible by any of them. 4. Thus q + 1 is also prime and greater than p.

Results Proof of the Main Theorem

This theme installs nearly transparent backgrounds for both block titles and block bodies. This theme is much less "aggressive" than the orchid theme. The background colors are derived from the foreground of the structure beamer-color.

158

16.1.4

Outer Color Themes

An outer color theme changes the palette colors, on which the colors used in the headline, footline, and sidebar are based by default. Outer color themes normally do not change the color of inner elements, except possibly for titlelike. They have happen to sea-animal names. \usecolortheme{whale} Example:
There Is No Largest Prime Number Euklid Results
Proof of the Main Theorem

There Is No Largest Prime Number Euklid

There Is No Largest Prime Number
The proof uses reductio ad absurdum.

There Is No Largest Prime Number
With an introduction to a new proof technique

Results
Proof of the Main Theorem

Theorem
Euklid of Alexandria
Depar tment of Mathematics University of Alexandria

There is no largest prime number.

Proof.
1. Suppose p were the largest prime number. 2. Let q be the product of the first p numbers. 3. Then q + 1 is not divisible by any of them. 4. Thus q + 1 is also prime and greater than p.

27th International Symposium on Prime Numbers, 280

Results Proof of the Main Theorem

Installs a white-on-dark palette for the headline, footline, and sidebar. The backgrounds used there are set to shades between the structure beamer-color and black. The foreground is set to white. While this color theme can appear to be aggressive, you should note that a dark bar at the border of a frame will have a somewhat different appearance during a presentation than it has on paper: During a presentation the pro jection on the wall is usually surrounded by blackness. Thus, a dark bar will not create a contrast as opposed to the way it does on paper. Indeed, using this theme will cause the main part of the frame to be more at the focus of attention. The counterpart to the theme with respect to blocks is the orchid theme. However, pairing it with the rose color theme is also interesting. \usecolortheme{seahorse} Example:
There Is No Largest Prime Number Euklid Results
Proof of the Main Theorem

There Is No Largest Prime Number Euklid

There Is No Largest Prime Number
The proof uses reductio ad absurdum.

There Is No Largest Prime Number
With an introduction to a new proof technique

Results
Proof of the Main Theorem

Theorem
Euklid of Alexandria
Depar tment of Mathematics University of Alexandria

There is no largest prime number.

Proof.
1. Suppose p were the largest prime number. 2. Let q be the product of the first p numbers. 3. Then q + 1 is not divisible by any of them. 4. Thus q + 1 is also prime and greater than p.

27th International Symposium on Prime Numbers, 280

Results Proof of the Main Theorem

Installs a near-transparent backgrounds for the headline, footline, and sidebar. Using this theme will cause navigational elements to be much less "dominant" than when using the whale theme (see the discussion on contrast there, though). It goes well with the rose or the lily color theme. Pairing it with the orchid overemphasizes blocks (in my opinion). \usecolortheme{dolphin} Example: 159

There Is No Largest Prime Number Euklid Results
Proof of the Main Theorem

There Is No Largest Prime Number Euklid

There Is No Largest Prime Number
The proof uses reductio ad absurdum.

There Is No Largest Prime Number
With an introduction to a new proof technique

Results
Proof of the Main Theorem

Theorem
Euklid of Alexandria
Depar tment of Mathematics University of Alexandria

There is no largest prime number.

Proof.
1. Suppose p were the largest prime number. 2. Let q be the product of the first p numbers. 3. Then q + 1 is not divisible by any of them. 4. Thus q + 1 is also prime and greater than p. Results Proof of the Main Theorem

27th International Symposium on Prime Numbers, 280

A color theme somewhere in the middle between the whale and the seahorse. It was graciously donated by Manuel Carro. Like the seahorse, it goes well with the rose and the lily color theme.

16.2

Changing the Colors Used for Different Elements of a Presentation

This section explains how beamer's color management works. 16.2.1 Overview of Beamer's Color Management

In beamer's philosophy, every element of a presentation can have a different color. Unfortunately, it turned out that simply assigning a single color to every element of a presentation is not such a good idea. First of all, we sometimes want colors of elements to change during a presentation, like the color of the item indicators when they become alerted or inside an example block. Second, some elements naturally have two colors, namely a foreground and a background, but not always. Third, sometimes element somehow should not have any special color but should simply "run along" with the color of their surrounding. Finally, giving a special color to every element makes it very hard to globally change colors (like changing all the different kind-of-blue things into kind-of-red things) and it makes later extensions even harder. For all these reasons, the color of an element in beamer is a structured ob ject, which I call a beamercolor. Every beamer-color has two parts: a foreground and a background. Either of these may be "empty," which means that whatever foreground or background was active before should remain active when the color is used. beamer-colors can inherit from other beamer-colors and the default themes make extensive use of this feature. For example, there is a beamer-color called structure and all sorts of elements inherit from this color. Thus, if someone changes structure, the color of all these elements automatically change accordingly. When a color inherits from another color, it can nevertheless still override only the foreground or the background. It is also possible to "inherit" from another beamer-color in a more sophisticated way, which is more like using the other beamer-color in an indirect way. You can specify that, say, the background of the title should be a 90% of the background of normal text and 10% of the foreground of structure. Inheritance and using of other beamer-colors is done dynamically. This means that if one of the parent beamer-colors changes during the presentation, the derived colors automatically also change. The default color theme, which is always loaded, installs numerous beamer-colors and inheritance relations between them. These colors are explained throughout this guide. The color used for, say, frametitles is discussed in the section on frametitles, and so on. 16.2.2 Using Beamer's Colors

A beamer-color is not a normal color as defined by the color and xcolor packages and, accordingly, cannot be used directly as in commands like \color or \colorlet. Instead, in order to use a beamer-color, you should first call the command \usebeamercolor, which is explained below. This command will setup two (normal) colors called fg (for foreground) and bg (for, well, guess what). You can then say \color{fg} to install the foreground color and \color{bg} to install the background color. You can also use the colors fg and bg in any context in which you normally use a color like, say, red. If a beamer-color does not have a foreground or a background, the colors fg or bg (or both) remain unchanged. Inside templates, this command will typically have already been called for you with the option [fg].

160

\usebeamercolor*[ fg or bg ]{ beamer-color name } This command (possibly) changes the two colors fg and bg to the foreground and background color of the beamer-color name . If the beamer-color does not specify a foreground, fg is left unchanged; if does not specify a background, bg is left unchanged. You will often wish to directly use the color fg or bg after using this command. For this common situation, the optional argument fg or bg is useful, which may be either fg or bg. Giving this option will cause the foreground fg or the background bg to be immediately installed after they have been setup. Thus, the following command
\usebeamercolor[fg]{normal text}

is a shortcut for
\usebeamercolor{normal text} \color{fg}

If you use the starred version of this command, the beamer-color normal text is used before the command is invoked. This ensures that, barring evil trickery, the colors fg and bg will be setup independently of whatever colors happened to be in use when the command is invoked. This command has special side-effects. First, the (normal) color parent.bg is set to the value of bg prior to this call. Thus you can access the color that was in use prior to the call of this command via the color parent.bg. Second, the special color beamer-color name .fg is global ly set to the same value as fg and beamer-color name .bg is globally set to the value of bg. This allows you to access the foreground or background of a certain beamer-color name after another beamer-color has been used. However, referring to these special global colors should be kept to the unavoidable minimum and should be done as locally as possible since a change of the beamer-color will not reflect in a change of the colors beamer-color name .fg and beamer-color name .bg until the next invocation of \usebeamercolor. Also, if the beamer-color name does not specify a foreground or a background color, then the values of the special colors are whatever happened to be the foreground or background at the time of the last invocation of \usebeamercolor. So, try not to get into the habit of writing \color{structure.fg} all the time, at least not without a \usebeamercolor{structure} close by. Example:
This text is {\usebeamercolor[fg]{alerted text} alerted}. The following box uses the fore- and background of frametitles: { \usebeamercolor[fg]{frametitle} \colorbox{bg}{Frame Title} }

article This command has no effect in article mode. \ifbeamercolorempty[ fg or bg ]{ beamer-color name }{ if undefined }{ if defined } This command can be used to check whether the foreground or background of some beamer-color name is non-empty. If the foreground or background of beamer-color name is defined, if defined will be executed, otherwise the if undefined code. Example:
\ifbeamercolorempty[bg]{frametitle} { % ``Transparent background'' \usebeamercolor[fg]{frametitle} \insertframetitle } { % Opaque background \usebeamercolor[fg]{frametitle} \colorbox{bg}{\insertframetitle} }

161

16.2.3

Setting Beamer's Colors

To set or to change a beamer-color, you can use the command \setbeamercolor. \setbeamercolor*{ beamer-color name }{ options } Sets or changes a beamer-color. The beamer-color name should be a reasonably simple text (do not try too much trickery and avoid punctuation symbols), but it may contain spaces. Thus, normal text is a valid beamer-color name and so is My Color Number 2. In the most simple case, you just specify a foreground by giving the fg= option and, possibly, also a background using the bg= option. Example: \setbeamercolor{normal text}{fg=black,bg=mylightgrey} Example: \setbeamercolor{alerted text}{fg=red!80!black} The effect of this command is accumulative, thus the following two commands
\setbeamercolor{section in toc}{fg=blue} \setbeamercolor{section in toc}{bg=white}

have the same effect as
\setbeamercolor{section in toc}{fg=blue,bg=white}

Naturally, a second call with the same kind of option set to a different value overrides a previous call. The starred version first resets everything, thereby "switching off " the accumulative effect. Use this starred version to completely reset the definition of some beamer-color. The following options may be given: · fg= color sets the foreground color of beamer-color name to the given (normal) color . The color may also be a color expression like red!50!black, see the manual of the xcolor package. If color is empty, the beamer-color name "has no special foreground" and when the color is used, the foreground currently in force should not be changed. Specifying a foreground this way will override any inherited foreground color. · bg= color does the same as the fg option, but for the background. · parent= parent beamer-color(s) specifies that beamer-color name should inherit from the specified parent beamer-color(s) . Any foreground and/or background color set by the parents will also be used when beamer-color name is used. If multiple parents specify a foreground, the last one "wins"; and likewise for the backgrounds. Example:
\setbeamercolor{father}{fg=red} \setbeamercolor{mother}{bg=green} \setbeamercolor{child}{parent={father,mother}} \begin{beamercolorbox}{child} Terrible red on green text. \end{beamercolorbox} \setbeamercolor{father}{fg=blue} \begin{beamercolorbox}{child} Now terrible blue on green text, since parent was changed. \end{beamercolorbox}

Note that a change of the foreground or background of a parent changes the corresponding foreground or background of the child (unless it is overruled). A beamer-color cannot only have parents, but also grandparents and so on. · use= another beamer-color is used to make sure that another beamer-color is setup correctly before the foreground or background color specification are evaluated. Suppose you wish the foreground of items to be a mixture of 50% of the foreground of structural elements and 50% of the normal foreground color. You could try
\setbeamercolor{item}{fg=structure.fg!50!normal text.fg}

162

However, this will not necessarily give the desired result: If the beamer-color structure changes, the (normal) color structure.fg is not immediately updated. In order to ensure that the normal color structure.fg is correct, use the following:
\setbeamercolor{item}{use={structure,normal text},fg=structure.fg!50!normal text.fg}

This will guarantee that the colors structure.fg and normal text.fg are setup correctly when the foreground of item is computed. To show the difference, consider the following example:
\setbeamercolor{grandfather}{fg=red} \setbeamercolor{grandmother}{bg=white} \setbeamercolor{father}{parent={grandfather,grandmother}} \setbeamercolor{mother}{fg=black} { \usebeamercolor{father}\usebeamercolor{mother} %% Defines father.fg and mother.fg globally } \setbeamercolor{my color A}{fg=father.fg!50!mother.fg} \setbeamercolor{my color B}{use={father,mother},fg=father.fg!50!mother.fg} {\usebeamercolor[fg]{my color A} dark red text} {\usebeamercolor[fg]{my color b} also dark red text} \setbeamercolor{grandfather}{fg=green} {\usebeamercolor[fg]{my color A} still dark red text} {\usebeamercolor[fg]{my color b} now dark green text}

16.3

The Color of Mathematical Text

By default, mathematical text does not have any special color--it just inherits the "surrounding" color. Some people prefer mathematical text to have some special color. Though I do not recommend this (I think mathematical text should not stand out admit the normal text), beamer makes it (reasonably) easy to change the color of mathematical text. Simply change the following colors: Beamer-Color math text This color is the parent of math text inlined and math text displayed. It is empty by default. See those colors for details. Beamer-Color math text inlined Color parents: math text If the foreground of this color is set, inlined mathematical text is typeset using this color. This is done via some \everymath hackery and may not work in all cases. If not, you'll have to try to find a way around the problem. The background is currently ignored. Beamer-Color math text displayed Color parents: math text Like math text inlined, only for so-called "displayed" mathematical text. This is mathematical text between \[ and \] or between $$ and $$ or inside environments like equation or align. The setup of this color is somewhat fragile, use at your own risk. The background is currently ignored. Beamer-Color normal text in math text If the foreground of this color is set, normal text inside mathematical text (which is introduced using the \text command) will be typeset using this color. The background is currently ignored.

16.4

The Color Palettes

When one designs a color theme, one faces the following problem: Suppose we want the colors in the headline to gradually change from black to, say, blue. Whatever is at the very top of the headline should be black, what comes right below it should be dark blue, and at the bottom of the headline things should just be blue. 163

Unfortunately, different outer themes will put different things at the top. One theme might put the author at the top, another theme might put the document title there. This makes it impossible to directly assign one of the three colors "black", "dark blue," and "blue" to the different elements that are typically rendered in the headline. No matter how we assign them, things will look wrong for certain outer themes. To circumvent this problem, beamer uses a layer of palette colors. Color themes typically only change these palette colors. For example, a color theme might make the beamer-color palette primary blue, make palette secondary a dark blue, and make palette tertiary black. Outer themes can now setup things such that whatever they show at the top of the headline inherits from palette tertiary, what comes below inherits from palette secondary, and whatever is at the bottom inherits from palette tertiary. This way, color themes can change the way even complicated outer themes look and they can do so consistently. Note that the user can still change the color of every element individually, simply by overriding the color(s) of the elements in the headline. In a sense, the palette colors are just a "suggestion" how things should be colored by an outer theme. In detail, the following palette colors are used by outer themes. Beamer-Color palette primary Outer themes (should) base the color of navigational elements and, possibly, also of other elements, on the four palette colors. The "primary" palette should be used for the most important navigational elements, which are usually the ones that change most often and hence require the most attention by the audience. The "secondary" and "tertiary" are less important, the "quaternary" one is least important. By default, the palette colors do not have a background and the foreground ranges from structure.fg to black. For the sidebar, there is an extra set of palette colors, see palette sidebar primary. Beamer-Color palette secondary See palette primary. Beamer-Color palette tertiary See palette primary. Beamer-Color palette quaternary See palette primary. Beamer-Color palette sidebar primary Similar to palette primary, only outer themes (should) base the colors of elements in the sidebar of the four sidebar palette colors. Beamer-Color palette sidebar secondary See palette sidebar primary. Beamer-Color palette sidebar tertiary See palette sidebar primary. Beamer-Color palette sidebar quaternary See palette sidebar primary.

16.5

Miscellaneous Colors

In this section some "basic" colors are listed that do not "belong" to any special commands. Beamer-Color/-Font normal text The color is used for normal text. At the beginning of the document the foreground color is installed as \normalcolor. The background of this color is used by the default background canvas for the background of the presentation, see Section 7.2.7. The background is also the default value of the normal color bg. Since the color is the "root" of all other beamer-colors, both a foreground and a background must be installed. In particular, to get a transparent background canvas, make the background of the beamercolor background canvas empty, not the background of this color. The beamer-font currently is not used. In particular, redefining this font will not have any effect. This is likely to change in the future. 164

Beamer-Color/-Font example text The color/font is used when text is typeset inside an example block. Beamer-Color/-Font titlelike This color/font is a more specialized form of the structure color/font. It is the base for all elements that are "like titles." This includes the frame title and subtitle as well as the document title and subtitle. Beamer-Color separation line The foreground of this color is used for separating lines. If the foreground is empty, no separation line is drawn. Beamer-Color upper separation line head Color parents: separation line Special case for the uppermost separation line in a headline. Beamer-Color middle separation line head Color parents: separation line Special case for the middle separation line in a headline. Beamer-Color lower separation line head Color parents: separation line Special case for the lower separation line in a headline. Beamer-Color upper separation line foot Color parents: separation line Special case for the uppermost separation line in a footline. Beamer-Color middle separation line foot Color parents: separation line Special case for the middle separation line in a footline. Beamer-Color lower separation line foot Color parents: separation line Special case for the lower separation line in a footline.

16.6

Transparency Effects

By default, covered items are not shown during a presentation. Thus if you write \uncover<2>{Text.}, the text is not shown on any but the second slide. On the other slide, the text is not simply printed using the background color it is not shown at all. This effect is most useful if your background does not have a uniform color. Sometimes however, you might prefer that covered items are not completely covered. Rather, you would like them to be shown already in a very dim or shaded way. This allows your audience to get a feeling for what is yet to come, without getting distracted by it. Also, you might wish text that is covered "once more" still to be visible to some degree. Ideally, there would be an option to make covered text "transparent." This would mean that when covered text is shown, it would instead be mixed with the background behind it. Unfortunately, pgf does not support real transparency yet. Instead, transparency is created by mixing the color of the ob ject you want to show with the current background color (the color bg, which has hopefully been setup such that it is the average color of the background on which the ob ject should be placed). To install this effect, you can use:
\setbeamercovered{transparent}

165

This command allows you to specify in a quite general way how a covered item should can even specify different ways of rendering the item depending on how long it will take shown or for how long it has already been covered once more. The transparency effect apply to all colors, except for the colors in images. For images there is a workaround, see of the pgf package. \setbeamercovered{ options }

be rendered. You before this item is will automatically the documentation

This command offers several different options, the most important of which is transparent. All options are internally mapped to the two options still covered and again covered. In detail, the following options may be given: · invisible is the default and causes covered text to "completely disappear. · transparent= opaqueness causes covered text to be typset in a "transparent" way. By default, this means that 85% of the background color is mixed into all colors or that the opaqueness of the text is 15%. You can specify a different percentage , where 0 means "totally transparent" and 100 means "totally opaque." Unfortunately, this value is kind of "specific" to every pro jector. What looks good on your screen need not look good during a presentation. · dynamic Makes all covered text quite transparent, but in a dynamic way. The longer it will take till the text is uncovered, the stronger the transparency. · highly dynamic Has the same effect as dynamic, but the effect is stronger. · still covered= not yet list specifies how to render covered items that have not yet been uncovered. The not yet list should be a list of \opaqueness commands, see the description of that command, below. Example:
\setbeamercovered{% still covered={\opaqueness<1>{15}\opaqueness<2>{10}\opaqueness<3>{5}\opaqueness<4->{2}}, again covered={\opaqueness<1->{15}}}

· again covered= once more list specifies how to render covered items that have once more been covered, that is, that had been shown before but are now covered again. \opaqueness< overlay specification >{ percentage of opaqueness } The overlay specification specifies on which slides covered text should have which percentage of opaqueness . Unlike other overlay specifications, this overlay specification is a "relative" overlay specification. For example, the specification "3" here means "things that will be uncovered three slides ahead," respectively "things that have once more been covered for three slides." More precisely, if an item is uncovered for more than one slide and then covered once more, only the "first moment of uncovering" is used for the calculation of how long the item has been covered once more. An opaqueness of 100 is fully opaque and 0 is fully transparent. Currently, since real transparency is not yet implemented, this command causes all colors to get a mixing of percentage of opaqueness of the current bg. At some future point this command might result in real transparency. The alternate pgf extension used inside an opaque area is percentage of opaqueness opaque. In case of nested calls, only the innermost opaqueness specification is used. Example:
\setbeamercovered{still covered={\opaqueness<1->{15}},again covered={\opaqueness<1->{15}}} \pgfdeclareimage{book}{book} \pgfdeclareimage{book.!15opaque}{filenameforbooknearlytransparent}

Makes everything that is uncovered in two slides only 15 percent opaque.

166

17

Fonts

The first subsection introduces the predefined font themes that come with beamer and which make it easy to change the fonts used in a presentation. The next subsection describes further special commands for changing some basic attributes of the fonts used in a presentation. The last subsection explains how you can get a much more fine-grained control over the fonts used for every individual element of a presentation.

17.1

Font Themes

beamer comes with a set of font themes. When you use such a theme, certain fonts are changed as described below. You can use several font themes in concert. For historical reasons, you cannot change all aspects of the fonts used using font themes--in same cases special commands and options are needed, which are described in the next subsection. The following font themes only change certain font attributes, they do not choose special font families (although that would also be possible and themes doing just that might be added in the future). Currently, to change the font family, you need to load special packages as explained in the next subsection. \usefonttheme{default} Example:
There Is No Largest Prime Number
The proof uses reductio ad absurdum.

There Is No Largest Prime Number
With an introduction to a new proof technique

Theorem
There is no largest prime number.

Euklid of Alexandria
Depar tment of Mathematics University of Alexandria

Proof.
1. Suppose p were the largest prime number. 2. Let q be the product of the first p numbers. 3. Then q + 1 is not divisible by any of them. 4. Thus q + 1 is also prime and greater than p.

27th International Symposium on Prime Numbers, 280

The default font theme installs a sans serif font for all text of the presentation. The default theme installs different font sizes for things like titles or head- and footlines, but does not use boldface or italics for "hilighting." To change some or all text to a serif font, use the serif theme. Note: The command \mathrm will always produce upright (not slanted), serif text and the command \mathsf will always produce upright, sans-serif text. The command \mathbf will produce upright, bold-face, sans-serif or serif text, depending on whether mathsans or mathserif is used. To produce an upright, sans-serif or serif text, depending on whether mathsans or mathserif is used, you can use for instance the command \operatorname from the amsmath package. Using this command instead of \mathrm or \mathsf directly will automatically adjust upright mathematical text if you switch from sans-serif to serif or back. \usefonttheme{professionalfonts} This font theme does not really change any fonts. Rather, it suppresses certain internal replacements performed by beamer. If you use "professional fonts" (fonts that you buy and that come with a complete set of every symbol in all modes), you do not want beamer to meddle with the fonts you use. beamer normally replaces certain character glyphs in mathematical text by more appropriate versions. For example, beamer will normally replace glyphs such that the italic characters from the main font are used for variables in mathematical text. If your professional font package takes care of this already, beamer's meddling should be switched off. Note that beamer's substitution is automatically turned off if one of the following packages is loaded: mathtime, mathpmnt, lucidabr, mtpro, and hvmath. If your favorite professional font package is not among these, use the professionalfont option (and write me an email, so that the package can be added).

167

\usefonttheme[ options ]{serif} Example:
There Is No Largest Prime Number
The proof uses reductio ad absurdum.

There Is No Largest Prime Number
With an introduction to a new proof technique

Theorem
Euklid of Alexandria
Department of Mathematics University of Alexandria

There is no largest prime number.

Proof.
1. Suppose p were the largest prime number. 2. Let q be the product of the first p numbers. 3. Then q + 1 is not divisible by any of them. 4. Thus q + 1 is also prime and greater than p.

27th International Symposium on Prime Numbers, 280

Results Proof of the Main Theorem

This theme causes all text to be typeset using the default serif font (except if you specify certain options ). You might wish to consult Section 5.6.2 on whether you should use serif fonts. The following options may be given: · stillsansserifmath causes mathematical text still to be typeset using sans serif. This option only makes sense if you also use the stillsansseriftext option since sans serif math inside serif text look silly. · stillsansserifsmall will cause "small" text to be still typeset using sans serif. This refers to the text in the headline, footline, and sidebars. Using this options is often advisable since small text is often easier to read in sans serif. · stillsansseriflarge will cause "large" text like the presentation title or the frame title to be still typeset using sans serif. Sans serif titles with serif text are a popular combination in typography. · stillsansseriftext will cause normal text (none of the above three) to be still typeset using sans serif. If you use this option, you should most likely also use the first two. However, by not using stillsansseriflarge, you get a serif (possibly italic) title over a sans serif text. This can be an interesting visual effect. Naturally, "interesting typographic effect" can mean "terrible typographic effect" if you choose the wrong fonts combinations or sizes. You'll need some typographic experience to judge this correctly. If in doubt, try asking someone who should now. · onlymath is a short-cut for selecting all of the above options except for the first. Thus, using this option causes only mathematical text to by typeset using a serif font. Recall that, by default, mathematical formulas are also typeset using sans-serif letters. In most cases, this is visually the most pleasing and easily readable way of typesetting mathematical formulas if the surrounding text is typeset using sans serif. However, in mathematical texts the font used to render, say, a variable is sometimes used to differentiate between different meanings of this variable. In such case, it may be necessary to typeset mathematical text using serif letters. Also, if you have a lot of mathematical text, the audience may be quicker to "parse" it if it is typeset the way people usually read mathematical text: in a serif font. \usefonttheme[ options ]{structurebold} Example:

168

There Is No Largest Prime Number
The proof uses reductio ad absurdum.

There Is No Largest Prime Number
With an introduction to a new proof technique Theorem There is no largest prime number. Proof. 1. Suppose p were the largest prime number. 2. Let q be the product of the first p numbers. 3. Then q + 1 is not divisible by any of them. 4. Thus q + 1 is also prime and greater than p. Results Proof of the Main Theorem

Euklid of Alexandria
Depar tment of Mathematics University of Alexandria

27th International Symposium on Prime Numbers, 280

This font theme will cause titles and text in the headlines, footlines, and sidebars to be typeset in a bold font. The following options may be given: · onlysmall will cause only "small" text to be typeset in bold. More precisely, only the text in the headline, footline, and sidebars is changed to be typeset in bold. Large titles are not affected. · onlylarge will cause only "large" text to be typeset in bold. These are the main title, frame titles, and section entries in the table of contents. As pointed out in Section 5.6.1, you should use this theme (possibly with the onlysmall option) if your font is not scaled down properly or for light-on-dark text. The normal themes do not install this theme by default, while the old compatibility themes do. Since you can reload the theme once it has been loaded, you cannot use this theme with the old compatibility themes to set also titles to a bold font. \usefonttheme[ options ]{structureitalicserif} Example:
There Is No Largest Prime Number
The proof uses reductio ad absurdum.

There Is No Largest Prime Number
With an introduction to a new proof technique Theorem There is no largest prime number. Proof. 1. Suppose p were the largest prime number. 2. Let q be the product of the first p numbers. 3. Then q + 1 is not divisible by any of them. 4. Thus q + 1 is also prime and greater than p. Results Proof of the Main Theorem

Euklid of Alexandria
Depar tment of Mathematics University of Alexandria

27th International Symposium on Prime Numbers, 280

This theme is similarly as the structurebold font theme, but where structurebold makes text bold, this theme typesets it in italics and in the standard serif font. The same options as for the structurebold theme are supported. See Section 5.6.3 for the pros and cons of using italics. \usefonttheme[ options ]{structuresmallcapsserif} Example:

169

THERE IS NO LARGEST PRIME NUMBER
T H E P RO O F U S E S reductio ad absurdum.

THERE IS NO LARGEST PRIME NUMBER
W
I T H A N I N T RO D U C T I O N T O A N E W P RO O F T E C H N I Q U E

T
Euklid of Alexandria
Depar tment of Mathematics University of Alexandria

HEOREM

There is no largest prime number.

P

RO O F.

1 . Suppose p were the largest prime number. 2 . Let q be the product of the first p numbers. 3 . Then q + 1 is not divisible by any of them. 4 . Thus q + 1 is also prime and greater than p.

27th International Symposium on Prime Numbers, 280

R

E S U LT S

Proof of the Main Theorem

Again, this theme does exactly the same as the structurebold font theme, only this time text is set using small caps and a serif font. The same options as for the structurebold theme are supported. See Section 5.6.3 for the pros and cons of using small caps.

17.2

Font Changes Made Without Using Font Themes

While most font decisions can be made using font themes, for historical reasons some changes can only be made using class options or by loading special packages. These options are explained in the following. Possibly, these options will be replaced by themes in the future. 17.2.1 Cho osing a Font Size for Normal Text really a good idea for to 11pt as usual. This s 96mm and the viewer you can put more onto

As pointed out in Section 5.6.1, measuring the default font size in points is not presentations. Nevertheless, beamer does just that, setting the default font size may seem ridiculously small, but the actual size of each frame is just 128mm time application enlarges the font. By specifying a default font size smaller than 11pt each slide, by specifying a larger font size you can fit on less. To specify the font size, you can use the following class options: \documentclass[8pt]{beamer} This is way too small. Requires that the package extsize is installed. \documentclass[9pt]{beamer} This is also too small. Requires that the package extsize is installed. \documentclass[10pt]{beamer}

If you really need to fit much onto each frame, use this option. Works without extsize. \documentclass[smaller]{beamer} Same as the 10pt option. \documentclass[11pt]{beamer} The default font size. You need not specify this option. \documentclass[12pt]{beamer} Makes all fonts a little bigger, which makes the text more readable. The downside is that less fits onto each frame. \documentclass[bigger]{beamer} Same as the 12pt option. \documentclass[14pt]{beamer} Makes all fonts somewhat bigger. Requires extsize to be installed.

170

\documentclass[17pt]{beamer} This is about the default size of PowerPoint. Requires extsize to be installed. \documentclass[20pt]{beamer} This is really huge. Requires extsize to be installed. 17.2.2 Cho osing a Font Family

By default, beamer uses the Computer Modern fonts. To change this, you can use one of the prepared A packages of L TEX's font mechanism. For example, to change to Times/Helvetica, simply add
\usepackage{mathptmx} \usepackage{helvet}

in your preamble. Note that if you do not use the serif font theme, Helvetica (not Times) will be selected as the text font. There may be many other fonts available on your installation. Typically, at least some of the following packages should be available: avant, bookman, chancery, charter, euler, helvet, mathtime, mathptm, mathptmx, newcent, palatino, pifont, utopia. 17.2.3 Cho osing a Font Enco dings

The same font can come in different encodings, which are (very roughly spoken) the ways the characters of a text are mapped to glyphs (the actual shape of a particular character in a particular font at a particular size). In TEX two encodings are often used with Latin characters: the T1 encoding and the OT1 encoding (old T1 encoding). Conceptually, the newer T1 encoding is preferable over the old OT1 encoding. For example, hyphenation of words containing umlauts (like the famous German word FrЁ aulein) will work only if you use the T1 encoding. Unfortunately, the EC fonts, that is, the T1-encoded Computer Modern fonts, are distributed on small installations just as MetaFont sources and only have bitmap renditions of each glyph. For this reason, using the T1-encoded EC fonts on such small installations will produce pdf files that render poorly. MiKTEX (for Windows platforms) and teTeX for unix/Linux can be installed with different levels of completeness. Concerning the Computer Modern fonts, the following packages can be installed: cm-super fonts, lmodern (Latin Modern) fonts, and lgc fonts, the latter containing the Latin, Greek, and Cyrillic alphabets. Concerning other fonts, the txfonts and pxfonts are two extended sets of the Times and the Palatino PostScript fonts, both packages containing extended sets of mathematical glyphs. Most other standard PostScript fonts are also available in T1 encoding. Among the packages that make available the Computer Modern fonts in the T1 encoding, the package lmodern may be suggested. If you use lmodern, several extra fonts become available (like a sans-serif boldface math) and extra symbols (like proper guillemots). To select the T1 encoding, use \usepackage[T1]{fontenc}. Thus, if you have the LM fonts installed, you could write
\usepackage{lmodern} \usepackage[T1]{fontenc}

to get beautiful outline fonts and correct hyphenation. Note, however, that certain older versions of the LM bundle did not include correct glyphs for ligatures like "fi," which may cause trouble. Double check that all ligatures are displayed correctly and, if not, update.

17.3

Changing the Fonts Used for Different Elements of a Presentation

This section explains how beamer's font management works. 17.3.1 Overview of Beamer's Font Management

beamer's font mechanism is somewhat similar to beamer's color mechanism, but not quite the same. As for colors, every beamer element, like the frame titles, the document title, the footnotes, and so on has a certain beamer-font. As for colors, on the one hand you can specify the font of each element individually; on the other hand fonts also use inheritance, thereby making it easy to globally change the fonts used for, say, "titlelike things" or for "itemizelike things." 171

While a beamer-color has a certain foreground and a certain background, either of which may be empty, a beamer-font has a size, a shape, a series, and a family, each of which may be empty. The inheritance relation among beamer-fonts is not necessarily the same as between beamer-colors, though I have tried to match them whenever possible. Multiple inheritance plays a more important rule for fonts than it does for colors. A font might inherit the attributes of two different fonts. If one of them specifies that the font should be, say, boldface and the other specifies that the font should be, say, large, then the child font will be both large and bold. As for fonts, the description of the font used for an element is given after the description of the element. 17.3.2 Using Beamer's Fonts

To use a beamer-font, you can use the command \usebeamerfont. Inside the templates for elements, this command will (typically) have already been called for you, so you will only seldomly have to use this command. \usebeamerfont*{ beamer-font name } This command changes the current font to the font specified by the beamer-font name . The beamer-font name can be a not-too-fancyful text and may contain spaces. Typical examples are frametitle or section in toc or My Font 1. beamer-fonts can have (and should) have the same name as beamer-templates and beamer-colors. Example: \usebeamerfont{frametitle} In the unstarred version of this command, in the beamer-font name , but unspecified specifies that the font should be "bold," but \usebeamerfont causes the the current font the font is changed according to the attributes specified attributes remain unchanged. For example, if the font specifies nothing else, and if the current font is large, then to become large and bold.

In the starred version of this command, the font is first reset before the font's attributes are applied. Thus, in the above example of a beamer-font having only the attribute "boldface" set, saying \usebeamerfont* will always cause the current font to become a normal-size, normal-shape, bold, default-family font. 17.3.3 Setting Beamer's Fonts

As for beamer-colors, there exists a central command for setting and changing beamer-fonts. \setbeamerfont*{ beamer-font name }{ attributes } This command sets or resets certain attributes of the beamer-font beamer-font name . In the unstarred version, this command just adds those attributes that have not been mentioned in a previous call and overwrites those that have been mentioned. Thus, the following two command blocks have the same effect: Example:
\setbeamerfont{frametitle}{size=\large} \setbeamerfont{frametitle}{series=\bfseries} \setbeamerfont{frametitle}{size=\large,series=\bfseries}

In the starred version, the font attributes are first completely reset, that is, set to be empty. The following attributes may be given: · size= size command sets the size attribute of the beamerfont. The size command should be A a normal L TEX-command used for setting the font size or it should be empty. Useful commands include \tiny, \scriptsize, \footnotesize, \small, \normalsize, \large, \Large, \huge, and \Huge. beamer also introduces the two font sizes \Tiny and \TINY for real ly small text. But you should know exactly what you are doing if you use them. You have been warned. Note that there is a different between specifying and empty command and specifying \normalsize: Making the size attribute "empty" means that the font size should not be changed when this font is used, while specifying \normalsize means that the size should be set to the normal size whenever this font is used.

172

· size*={ size in pt }{ baselineskip } sets the size attribute of the font to the given size in pt and the baseline skip to the given value. Note that, depending on what kind of font you use, not all font sizes may be available. Also, certain font sizes are much less desirable than other ones; the standard commands take care of choosing appropriate sizes for you. Do not use this options unless you have a good reason. This command has the same effect as size={\fontsize{ size in pt }{ baselineskip }}. · shape= shape command sets the shape attribute of the font. The command should be command like \itshape, \slshape, \scshape, or \upshape.
A · shape*={ shape attribute abbreviation } sets the shape attribute of the font using the L TEX's abbreviations for attributes. This command has the same effect as shape={\fontshape{ shape attributes abbreviation }}.

· series= series command sets the "series" attribute of the font. The command should be command like \bfseries. · series*={ series attribute abbreviation } has the same effect as series={\fontseries{ series attributes abbreviation }}.
A · family= family command sets the font family attribute. The command should be a L TEX-font command like \rmfamily or \sffamily.

· family*={ family name } sets the font family attribute to the given family name . The command has the same effect as family={\fontfamily{ family name }}. The family name is, normally, a somewhat cryptic abbreviation of a font family name that installed somewhere on the system. For example, the family name for Times happens to be ptm. No one can remember these names, so its perfectly normal if you have to look them up laboriously. · parent={ parent list } specifies a list of parent fonts. When the beamer-font is used, the parents are used first. Thus, any font attributes set by one of the parents is inherited by the beamer-font, except if this attribute is overwritten by the font. Example:
\setbeamerfont{parent A}{size=\large} \setbeamerfont{parent B}{series=\bfseries} \setbeamerfont{child}{parent={parent A, parent B},size=\small} \normalfont This text is in a normal font. \usebeamerfont{parent A} This text is large. \usebeamerfont{parent B} This text is large and bold. \usebeamerfont{parent B} This text is still large and bold. \usebeamerfont*{parent B} This text is only bold, but not large. \usebeamerfont{child} This text is small and bold.

173

Part IV

Creating Supp orting Material
The ob jective of the beamer class is to simplify the creation of presentations using a pro jector. However, a presentation rarely exists in isolation. Material that accompanies a presentation includes: · Presentations should normally be accompanied by handouts, written text that the audience can read during and/or after your presentation is given. · You might wish to create notes for yourself that, ideally, are shown to you on your computer screen while the audience sees the presentation. · You might wish to create a printout of your talk, either for yourself for checking for errors. · You might wish to create a transparancies version of your talk as a fall-back. This part dicusses how beamer helps you with the creation of the above.

174

18

Adding Notes for Yourself

A note is text that is intended as a reminder to yourself of what you should say or should keep in mind when presenting a slide. Notes are usually printed out on paper, but with two-screen support they can also be shown on your laptop screen while the main presentation is shown on the pro jector.

18.1

Sp ecifying Note Contents

To add a note to a slide or a frame, use the \note command. This command can be used both inside and outside frames, but it has quite different behaviors then: Inside frames, \note commands accumulate and append a single note page after the current slide; outside frames each \note directly inserts a single note page with the given parameter as contents. Using the \note command inside frames is usually preferably over using them outside, since only commands issued inside frames profit from the class option onlyslideswithnotes, see below. lyx In LYX, only the inside-frame \note command with the option [item] is available in the form of the NoteItem style. Inside a frame, the effect of \note text is the following: When you use it somewhere inside the frame on a specific slide, a note page is created after the slide, containing the text . Since you can add an overlay specification to the \note command, you can specify after which slide the note should be shown. If you use multiple \note commands on one slide, they "accumulate" and are all shown on the same note. To make the accumulation of notes more convenient, you can use the \note command with the option [item]. The notes added with this option are accumulated in an enumerate list that follows any text inserted using \note. The following example will produce one note page that follows the second slide and has two entries.
\begin{frame} \begin{itemize} \item<1-> Eggs \item<2-> Plants \note[item]<2>{Tell joke about plants.} \note[item]<2>{Make it short.} \item<3-> Animals \end{itemize} \end{frame}

Outside frames, the command \note creates a single note page. It is "independent" of any usage of the \note commands inside the previous frame. If you say \note inside a frame and \note right after it, two note pages are created. In the following, the syntax and effects of the \note command inside frames is described: \note< overlay specification >[ options ]{ note text } Effects inside frames: This command command on a to al l slides of usually a good appends the note text to the note that follows the current slide. Multiple uses of this slide accumulate. If you do not specify an overlay specification , the note will be added the current frame. This is often not what you want, so adding a specification like <1> is idea.

The following options may be given: · item causes the note to be put as an item in a list that is shown at the end of the note page. Example: \note<2>{Do not talk longer than 2 minutes about this.} article Notes are ignored in article mode. lyx Use the NoteItem style to insert a note item. Next, the syntax and effects of the \note command outside frames are described: \note[ options ]{ note text } Outside frames, this command creates a note page. This command is not affected by the option notes=onlyframeswithnotes, see below. The following options may be given: 175

· itemize will enclose the whole note page in an itemize environment. This is just a convenience. · enumerate will enclose the whole note page in an enumerate environment. Example:
\frame{some text} \note{Talk no more than 1 minute.} \note[enumerate] { \item Stress this first. \item Then this. }

article Notes are ignored in article mode. The following element dictates who the note pages are rendered: Beamer-Template/-Color/-Font note page This template is used to typeset a note page. The template should contain a mentioning of the insert \insertnote, which will contain the note text. To squeeze more onto note pages you might consider changing the size of the beamer-font note page to something small. The default is \small. The following template options are predefined: · [default] The default template shows the last slide in the upper right corner and some "hints" that should help you match a note page to the slide that is currently shown. · [compress] The option produces an output that is similar to the default, only more fits onto each note page at the price of legibility. · [plain] Just inserts the note text, no fancy hints. The following two inserts are useful for note pages: · \insertnote Inserts the text of the current note into the template. · \insertslideintonotes{ magnification } Inserts a "mini picture" of the last slide into the current note. The slide will be scaled by the given magnification. Example: \insertslideintonotes{0.25} This will give a mini slide whose width and height are one fourth of the usual size.

18.2

Sp ecifying Contents for Multiple Notes

Sometimes you wish some text to be shown on every note or at least on every note in a long series of notes. To achieve this effect, you can use the following two commands: \AtBeginNote{ text } The text will be inserted at the beginning of every note in the scope of the command. To stop the effect, either use \AtBeginNote{} or enclose the area in a TEX group. It is advisable to add a \par command or an empty line at the end of the text since otherwise any note text will directly follow the text without a line break. Example:
\section{My Section} \AtBeginNote{Finish this section by 14:35.\par} \begin{frame} ... \note{some note} \end{frame} \begin{frame} ... \note{some other note} \end{frame} \AtBeginNote{}

176

\AtEndNote{ text } This command behaves the same way as \AtBeginNote, except that the text is inserted at the end (bottom). You may wish to add a \par at the beginning of text .

18.3

Sp ecifying Which Notes and Frames Are Shown

Since you normally do not wish the notes to be part of your presentation, you must explicitly say so in the preamble if notes should be included in your presentation. You can use the following beamer options for this: \setbeameroption{hide notesN} otes are not shown. This is the default in a presentation. \setbeameroption{show notesI} nclude notes in the output file. Normal slides are also included and the note pages are interleaved with them. \setbeameroption{show notes on second screen= location } When this option is given, a two screen version of your talk is created, see Section 21 for further details. The second screen, which is displayed on the right by default, shows your notes. By specifying a different location , you can also place the second screen on the left, bottom, or top. Example:
\documentclass{beamer} \usepackage{pgfpages} \setbeameroption{notes on second screen} \begin{document} \begin{frame} A frame. \note{This is shown on the right.} \end{frame} \end{document}

In detail, the following happens: The presentation is typeset normally and shown on the main screen or, to be precise, on pgfpages's logical page number zero. The second screen (logical screen number one) is initialized to be empty. Whenever a note page is to be typeset, either because a frame contained \note commands or because the frame was followed by a \note command, the note page is normally typeset. Then the note page is put on the second screen. Then the whole page is shipped out. (The exact details are bit more complex, but that is what happens, basically.) An important effect of this behavior is that a note page fol lowing a frame is shown next to this frame. Normally, this is exactly what you want and expect. However, if there are multiple note pages for a single slide only the last one is shown, currently. This may change in the future, so do not rely on this effect. Example:
\begin{frame} First frame. \end{frame} \note{This note is not shown at all (currently).} \note{This note is shown together with the first frame.} \begin{frame} Second frame. \note{This note is shown together with the second frame.} \end{frame} \begin{frame} No note text is shown for this frame. \end{frame}

177

If you really need multiple note pages for a single slide, you will have to use something more complicated like this:
\begin{frame}<1-3> First frame. \note<1>{First page of notes for this frame.} \note<2>{Second page of notes for this frame.} \note<3>{Third page of notes for this frame.} \end{frame}

\setbeameroption{show only notesI} nclude only the notes in the output file and suppresses all frames. This options is useful for printing them. If you specify this command, the .aux and .toc files are not updated. So, if you add a section and reTEX your presentation, this will not be reflected in the navigation bars (which you do not see anyway since only notes are output).

178

19

Creating Transparancies

The main aim of the beamer class is to create presentations for beamers. However, it is often useful to print transparencies as backup, in case the hardware fails. A transparencies version of a talk often has less slides than the main version, since it takes more time to switch slides, but it may have more slides than the handout version. For example, while in a handout an animation might be condensed to a single slide, you might wish to print several slides for the transparency version. In order to create a transparencies version, specify the class option trans. If you do not specify anything else, this will cause all overlay specifications to be suppressed. For most cases this will create exactly the desired result. \documentclass[trans]{beamer} Create a version that uses the trans overlay specifications. In some cases, you may want a more complex behaviour. For example, if you use many \only commands to draw an animation. In this case, suppressing all overlay specifications is not such a good idea, since this will cause all steps of the animation to be shown at the same time. In some cases this is not desirable. Also, it might be desirable to suppress some \alert commands that apply only to specific slides in the handout. For a fine-grained control of what is shown on a handout, you can use mode specifications. They specify which slides of a frame should be shown for a special version, for example for the handout version. As explained in Section 8.2, a mode specification is written alongside the normal overlay specification inside the pointed brackets. It is separated from the normal specification by a vertical bar and a space. Here is an example:
\only<1-3,5-9| trans:2-3,5>{Text}

This specification says: "Normally (in parencies version, insert the text only trans mode, the default is "always." the overlay specification is effectively s An especially useful specification is

beamer mode), insert the text on slides 13 and 59. For the transon slides 2, 3, and 5." If no special mode specification is given for This causes the desirable effect that if you do not specify anything, uppressed for the handout. the following:

\only<3| trans:0>{Not shown on transparancies.}

Since there is no zeroth slide, the text is not shown. Likewise, \alert<3| trans:0>{Text} will not alert the text on a transparancy. You can also use a mode specification for the overlay specification of the {frame} environment as in the following example.
\begin{frame}<1-| trans:0> Text... \end{frame}

This causes the frame to be suppressed in the transparancies version. Also, you can restrict the presentation such that only specific slides of the frame are shown on the handout:
\begin{frame}<1-| trans:4-5> Text... \end{frame}

It is also possible to give only an alternate overlay specification. For example, \alert{...} causes the text to be always hilighted during the presentation, but never on the transparancies version. Likewise, \frame{...} causes the frame to be suppressed for the handout. Finally, note that it is possible to give more than one alternate overlay specification and in any order. For example, the following specification states that the text should be inserted on the first three slides in the presentation, in the first two slides of the transparency version, and not at all in the handout.
\only{Text}

If you wish to give the same specification in all versions, you can do so by specifying all: as the version. For example,
\frame{blah...}

ensures that the frame has two slides in all versions. 179

20

Creating Handouts and Lecture Notes

During a presentation it is very much desirable that the audience has a handout or even lecture notes available to it. A handout allows everyone in the audience to individually go back to things he or she has not understood. Always provide handouts as early as possible, preferably weeks before the talk. Do not retain the handout till the end of the talk. The beamer package offers two different ways of creating special versions of your talk; they are discussed in the following. The first, easy, way is to create a handout version by adding the handout option, which will cause the document to be typeset in handout mode. It will "look like" a presentation, but it can be printed more easily (the overlays are "flattened"). The second, more complicated and more powerful way is to create an independent "article" version of your presentation. This version coexists in your main file.

20.1

Creating Handouts Using the Handout Mo de

The easiest way of creating a handout for your audience (though not the most desirable one) is to use the handout option. This option works exactly like the trans option. An elaborated example of different overlay specifications for the presentation, the handout, and the transparencies can be found in the file beamerexample1.tex. \documentclass[handout]{beamer} Create a version that uses the handout overlay specifications. You might wish to choose a different color and/or presentation theme for the handout. When printing a handout created this way, you will typically wish to print at least two and possibly four slides on each page. The easiest way of doing so is presumably to use pgfpages as follows:
\usepackage{pgfpages} \pgfpagelayout{2 on 1}[a4paper,border shrink=5mm]

Instead of 2 on 1 you can use 4 on 1 (but then you have to add landscape to the list of options) and you can use, say, letterpaper instead of a4paper.

20.2

Creating Handouts Using the Article Mo de

In the following, the "article version" of your presentation refers to a normal TEX text typeset using, for example, the document class article or perhaps llncs or a similar document class. This version of the presentation will typically follow different typesetting rules and may even have a different structure. Nevertheless, you may wish to have this version coexist with your presentation in one file and you may wish to share some part of it (like a figure or a formula) with your presentation. In general, the article version of a talk is better suited as a handout thann a handout created using the simple handout mode since it is more economic and can include more in-depth information. 20.2.1 Starting the Article Mo de

The article mode of a presentation is created by specifying article or book or some other class as the document class instead of beamer and by then loading the package beamerarticle. The package beamerarticle defines virtually all of beamer's commands in a way that is sensible for the article mode. Also, overlay specifications can be given to commands like \textbf or \item once beamerarticle has been loaded. Note that, except for \item, these overlay specifications also work: by writing \section{Name} you will suppress this section command in the article version. For the exact effects overlay specifications have in article mode, please see the descriptions of the commands to which you wish to apply them. \usepackage[ options ]{beamerarticle} Makes most beamer commands available for another document class. The following options may be given:

180

· activeospeccharacters will leave the character code of the pointed brackets as specified by other packages. Normally, beamer will turn off the special behaviour of the two characters < and >. Using this option, you can reinstall the original behaviour at the price of possible problems when using overlay specifications in the article mode. · noamsthm will suppress the loading of the amsthm package. No theorems will be defined. · notheorem will suppress the definition of standard environments like theorem, but amsthm is still loaded and the \newtheorem command still makes the defined environments overlay-specificationaware. Using this option allows you to define the standard environments in whatever way you like while retaining the power of the extensions to amsthm. · envcountsect causes theorem, definitions and the like to be numbered with each section. Thus instead of Theorem 1 you get Theorem 1.1. I recommend using this option. · noxcolor will suppress the loading of the xcolor package. No colors will be defined. Example:
\documentclass{article} \usepackage{beamerarticle} \begin{document} \begin{frame} \frametitle{A frame title} \begin{itemize} \item<1-> You can use overlay specifications. \item<2-> This is useful. \end{itemize} \end{frame} \end{document}

There is one remaining problem: While the article version can easily TEX the whole file, even in the presence of commands like \frame<2>, we do not want the special article text to be inserted into our original beamer presentation. That means, we would like all text between frames to be suppressed. More precisely, we want all text except for commands like \section and so on to be suppressed. This behaviour can be enforced by specifying the option ignorenonframetext in the presentation version. The option will insert a \mode* at the beginning of your presentation. The following example shows a simple usage of the article mode:
\documentclass[a4paper]{article} \usepackage{beamerarticle} %\documentclass[ignorenonframetext,red]{beamer} \mode

{\usepackage{fullpage}} \mode{\usetheme{Berlin}} % everyone: \usepackage[english]{babel} \usepackage{pgf} \pgfdeclareimage[height=1cm]{myimage}{filename} \begin{document} \section{Introduction} This is the introduction text. This text is not shown in the presentation, but will be part of the article. \begin{frame} \begin{figure} % In the article, this is a floating figure, % In the presentation, this figure is shown in the first frame \pgfuseimage{myimage} \end{figure} \end{frame}

181

This text is once more not shown in the presentation. \section{Main Part} While this text is not shown in the presentation, the section command also applies to the presentation. We can add a subsection that is only part of the article like this: \subsection

{Article-Only Section} With some more text. \begin{frame} This text is part both of the article and of the presentation. \begin{itemize} \item This stuff is also shown in both version. \item This too. \only

{\item This particular item is only part of the article version.} \item This text is also only part of the article. \end{itemize} \end{frame} \end{document}

There is one command whose behaviour is a bit special in article mode: The line break command \\. Inside frames, this command has no effect in article mode, except if an overlay specification is present. Then it has the normal effect dictated by the specification. The reason for this behaviour is that you will typically inserts lots of \\ commands in a presentation in order to get control over all line breaks. These line breaks are mostly superfluous in article mode. If you really want a line break to apply in all versions, say \\. Note that the command \\ is often redefined by certain environments, so it may not always be overlay-specification-aware. In such a case you have to write something like \only{\\}. 20.2.2 Workflow

The following workflow steps are optional, but they can simplify the creation of the article version. · In the main file main.tex, delete the first line, which sets the document class. · Create a file named, say, main.beamer.tex with the following content:
\documentclass[ignorenonframetext]{beamer} \input{main.tex}

· Create an extra file named, say, main.article.tex with the following content:
\documentclass{article} \usepackage{beamerarticle} \setjobnamebeamerversion{main.beamer} \input{main.tex}

· You can now run pdflatex or latex on the two files main.beamer.tex and main.article.tex. The command \setjobnamebeamerversion tells the article version where to find the presentation version. This is necessary if you wish to include slides from the presentation version in an article as figures. \setjobnamebeamerversion{ filename without extension } Tells the beamer class where to find the presentation version of the current file. An example of this workflow approach can be found in the examples subdirectory for files starting with beamerexample2.

182

20.2.3

Including Slides from the Presentation Version in the Article Version

If you use the package beamerarticle, the \frame command becomes available in article mode. By adjusting the frame template, you can "mimic" the appearance of frames typeset by beamer in your articles. However, sometimes you may wish to insert "the real thing" into the article version, that is, a precise "screenshot" of a slide from the presentation. The commands introduced in the following help you do exactly this. In order to include a slide from your presentation in your article version, you must do two things: First, A you must place a normal L TEX label on the slide using the \label command. Since this command is overlayspecification-aware, you can also select specific slides of a frame. Also, by adding the option label= name to a frame, a label name < slide number > is automatically added to each slide of the frame. Once you have labeled a slide, you can use the following command in your article version to insert the slide into it: \includeslide[ options ]{ label name } This command calls \pgfimage with the given options for the file specified by \setjobnamebeamerversion filename Furthermore, the option page= page of label name is passed to \pgfimage, where the page of label name is read internally from the file filename .snm. Example:
\article \begin{figure} \begin{center} \includeslide[height=5cm]{slide1} \end{center} \caption{The first slide (height 5cm). Note the partly covered second item.} \end{figure} \begin{figure} \begin{center} \includeslide{slide2} \end{center} \caption{The second slide (original size). Now the second item is also shown.} \end{figure}

The exact effect of passing the option page= page of label name to the command \pgfimage is explained in the documentation of pgf. In essence, the following happens: · For old version of pdflatex and for any version of latex together with dvips, the pgf package will look for a file named filename .page page of label name . extension For each page of your .pdf or .ps file that is to be included in this way, you must create such a file by hand. For example, if the PostScript file of your presentation version is named main.beamer.ps and you wish to include the slides with page numbers 2 and 3, you must create (single page) files main.beamer.page2.ps and main.beamer.page3.ps "by hand" (or using some script). If these files cannot be found, pgf will complain. · For new versions of pdflatex, pdflatex also looks for the files according to the above naming scheme. However, if it fails to find them (because you have not produced them), it uses a special mechanism to directly extract the desired page from the presentation file main.beamer.pdf.

20.3

Details on Mo des

This subsection describes how modes work exactly and how you can use the \mode command to control what part of your text belongs to which mode. When beamer typesets your text, it is always in one of the following five modes: · beamer is the default mode.

183

· second is the mode used when a slide for an optional second screen is being typeset. · handout is the mode for creating handouts. · trans is the mode for creating transparencies. · article is the mode when control has been transferred to another class, like article.cls. Note that the mode is also article if control is transferred to, say, book.cls. In addition to these modes, beamer recognizes the following names for modes sets: · all refers to all modes. · presentation refers to the first four modes, that is, to all modes except for the article mode. Depending on the current mode, you may wish to have certain text inserted only in that mode. For example, you might wish a certain frame or a certain table to be left out of your article version. In some situations, you can use the \only command for this purpose. However, the command \mode, which is described in the following, is much more powerful than \only. The command actually comes in three "flavors," which only slightly differ in syntax. The first, and simplest, is the version that takes one argument. It behaves essentially the same way as \only. \mode< mode specification >{ text } Causes the text to be inserted only for the specified modes. Recall that a mode specification is just an overlay specification in which no slides are mentioned. The text should not do anything fancy that involves mode switches or including other files. In particular, you should not put an \include command inside text . Use the argument-free form below, instead. Example:
\mode

{Extra detail mentioned only in the article version.} \mode {\frame{\tableofcontents[currentsection]}}

The second flavor of the \mode command takes no argument. "No argument" means that it is not followed by an opening brace, but any other symbol. \mode< mode specification > In the specified mode, this command actually has no effect. The interesting part is the effect in the non-specified modes: In these modes, the command causes TEX to enter a kind of "gobbling" state. It will now ignore all following lines until the next line that has a sole occurrence of one of the following commands: \mode, \mode*, \begin{document}, \end{document}. Even a comment on this line will make TEX skip it. Note that the line with the special commands that make TEX stop gobbling may not directly follow the line where the gobbling is started. Rather, there must either be one non-empty line before the special command or at least two empty lines. When TEX encounters a single \mode command, it will execute this command. If the command is \mode command of the first flavor, TEX will resume its "gobbling" state after having inserted (or not inserted) the argument of the \mode command. If the \mode command is of the second flavor, it takes over. Using this second flavor of \mode is less convenient than the first, but there are different reasons why you might need to use it: · The line-wise gobbling is much faster than the gobble of the third flavor, explained below. · The first flavor reads its argument completely. This means, it cannot contain any verbatim text that contains unbalanced braces. · The first flavor cannot cope with arguments that contain \include. · If the text mainly belongs to one mode with only small amounts of text from another mode inserted, this second flavor is nice to use.

184

Note: When searching line-wise for a \mode command to shake it out of its gobbling state, TEX will not recognize a \mode command if a mode specification follows on the same line. Thus, such a specification must be given on the next line. Note: When a TEX file ends, TEX must not be in the gobbling state. Switch this state off using \mode on one line and on the next. Example:
\mode

This text is typeset only in |article| mode. \verb!verbatim text is ok {! \mode { % this text is inserted only in presentation mode \frame{\tableofcontents[currentsection]}} Here we are back to article mode stuff. This text is not inserted in presentation mode \mode This text is only inserted in presentation mode.

The last flavor of the mode command behaves quite differently. \mode* The effect of this mode is to ignore all text outside frames in the presentation modes. In article mode it has no effect. This mode should only be entered outside of frames. Once entered, if the current mode is a presentation mode, TEX will enter a gobbling state similar to the gobbling state of the second "flavor" of the \mode command. The difference is that the text is now read token-wise, not line-wise. The text is gobbled token by token until one of the following tokens is found: \mode, \frame, \againframe, \part, \section, \subsection, \appendix, \note, \begin{frame}, and \end{document} (the last two are really tokens, but they are recognized anyway). Once one of these commands is encountered, the gobbling stops and the command is executed. However, all of these commands restore the mode that was in effect when they started. Thus, once the command is finished, TEX returns to its gobbling. Normally, \mode* is exactly what you want TEX to do outside of frames: ignore everything except for the above-mentioned commands outside frames in presentation mode. However, there are cases in which you have to use the second flavor of the \mode command instead: If you have verbatim text that contains one of the commands, if you have very long text outside frames, or if you wish some text outside a frame (like a definition) to be executed also in presentation mode. The class option ignorenonframetext will switch on \mode* at the beginning of the document. Example:
\begin{document} \mode* This text is not shown in the presentation. \begin{frame} This text is shown both in article and presentation mode. \end{frame} this text is not shown in the presentation again. \section{This command also has effect in presentation mode}

185

Back to article stuff again. \frame { this frame is shown only in the presentation. } \end{document}

Example: The following example shows how you can include other files in a main file. The contents of a main.tex:
\documentclass[ignorenonframetext]{beamer} \begin{document} This is star mode stuff. Let's include files: \mode \include{a} \include{b} \mode* Back to star mode \end{document}

And a.tex (and likewise b.tex):
\mode* \section{First section} Extra text in article version. \begin{frame} Some text. \end{frame} \mode

186

21

Taking Advantage of Multiple Screens

This section describes options provided by beamer for taking advantage of computers that have more than one video output and can display different outputs on them. For such systems, one video output can be attached to a pro jector and the main presentation is shown there. The second video output is attached to a small extra monitor (or is just shown on the display of the computer) and shows, for example, special notes for you. Alternatively, the two outputs might be attached to two different pro jectors. One can then show the main presentation on the first pro jection and, say, the table of contents on the second. Or the second pro jection might show a version translated into a different language. Or the seoncd pro jection might alwyas show the "previous" slide. Or . . . --I am sure you can think of further useful things. The basic idea behind beamer's support of two video outputs is the following: Using special options you can ask beamer to create a pdf-file in which the "pages" are unusually wide or high. By default, their height will still be 128mm, but their width will be 192mm (twice the usual 96mm). These "superwide" pages will show the slides of the main presentation on the left and auxilliary material on the right (this can be switched using appropriate options, though hyperlinks will only work if the presentation is on the left and the second screen on the right). For the presentation you attach two screens to the system. The windowing system believe that the screen is twice as wide as it actually is. Everything the windowing system puts on the left half of this big virtual screen is redirected to the first video output, everything on the right half is redirected to the second video output. When the presentation program displays the specially prepared superwide beamer-presentation, exactly the left half of the screen will be filled with the main presentation, the right part is filled with the auxilliary material--voil` Not all presentation programs support this special feature. For example, the Acrobat a. Reader 6.0.2 will only use one screen in fullscreen mode on MacOS X. You will have to find out for yourself whether your display program and system support showing superwise presentations stretching over two screens. beamer uses the package pgfpages to typeset two-screen presentations. Because of this, your first step when creating a two-screen presentation is to include this package:
\documentclass{beamer} \usepackage{pgfpages}

The next step is to choose an appropriate option for showing something special on the second screen. These options are discussed in the following sections. One of the things these options do is to setup a certain pgfpages-layout that is appropriate for two-screen presentations. However, you can still change hte pgfpages-layout arbitrarily, afterwards. For example, you might wish to enlarge the virtual pages. For details, see the documentation of pgfpages.

21.1

Showing Notes on the Second Screen

The first way to use a second screen is to show the presentation on the main screen and to show your notes on the second screen. The option show notes on second screen can be used for this. It is described on page 177.

21.2

Showing Second Mo de Material on the Second Screen

The second way to use the second screen is to show "a different vesion" of the presentation on the second screen. This different version might be a translation or it might just always be the current table of contents. To specify what is shown on the second screen, you can use a special beamer-mode called second. This mode behaves similar to modes like handout or beamer, but its effect depends on the exact options used: \setbeameroption{second mode text on second screen= location } This option causes the second screen to show the second mode material. The location of the second screen can be left, right, bottom, or top. In detail, the following happens: When a new frame needs to be typeset, beamer checks whether the special option typeset second is given. If not, the frame is typeset normally and the slides are put on the main presentation screen (more precisely, on the logical pgfpages-page number zero). The second screen (logical page number one) shows whatever it showed before the frame was typeset.

187

If the special frame option typeset second is given, after each slide of the frame the frame contents is typeset once more, but this time for the mode second. This results in another slide, which is put on the second screen (on logical page number one). Then the whole page is shipped out. The second mode behaves more like the beamer mode than other modes: Any overlay specification for beamer will also apply to second mode, unless an explicit second mode specification is also given. In particular, \only<1-2>{Text} will be shown on slides 1 and 2 in second mode, but only on the first slide in handout mode or trans mode. Example:
\documentclass{beamer} \usepackage{pgfpages} \setbeameroption{second mode text on second screen} \begin{document} \begin{frame}[typeset second] This text is shown on the left and on the right. \only{This text is only shown on the right.} \only{This text is only shown on the left.} \end{document} \begin{frame} This text is shown on the left. The right shows the same as for the previous frame. \end{frame} \begin{frame}[typeset second] \alt{The \string\alt command is useful for second mode. Let's show the table of contents, here: \tableofcontents} {Here comes some normal text for the first slide.} \end{frame} \end{document}

Example: The following example shows how translations can be added in a comfortable way.
\documentclass{beamer} \usepackage{pgfpages} \setbeameroption{second mode text on second screen} \DeclareRobustCommand\translation[1]{\mytranslation#1\relax} \long\def\mytranslation#1|#2\relax{\alt{#2}{#1}} \title{\translation{Preparing Presentations|Vortr\"age vorbereiten}} \author{Till Tantau} \begin{document} \begin{frame}[typeset second] \titlepage \end{frame} \begin{frame}[typeset second] \frametitle{\translation{This is the frame title.|Dies ist der Titel des Rahmens.}} \begin{itemize} \item<1-> \translation{First|Erstens}. \item<2-> \translation{Second|Zweitens}. \item<3-> \translation{Third|Drittens}. \end{itemize} \translation{Do not use line-by-line uncovering.|Man sollte Text nicht Zeile f\"ur Zeile aufdecken.} \end{frame} \end{document}

In the last of the above example, it is a bit bothersome that the option typeset second has to be added to each frame. The following option globally sets this option: \setbeameroption{always typeset second mode= true or false } When this option is set to true, every following frame will have the option typeset second set to true.

21.3

Showing the Previous Slide on the Second Screen

\setbeameroption{previous slide on second screen= location } 188

This option causes the second screen to show the previous slide that was typeset, unless this is overruled by a frame with the [typeset second] option set. The idea is that if you have two pro jectors you can always present "the last two" slides simultaneously and talk about them. Using this option will switch off the updating of external files like the table of contents.

189

Part V

Howtos
This part contains explanations-of-how-to-do-things (commonly known as howtos ). These explanations are not really part of the "beamer core." Rather, they explain how to use beamer to achieve a certain effect or how get something special done. The first howto is about tricky uncovering situations. A The second howto explains how you can import (parts or) presentations created using some other L TEXpresentation class, like prosper.

190

22
22.1

How To Uncover Things Piecewise
Uncovering an Enumeration Piecewise

A common usage of overlays is to show a list of points in an enumeration in a piecewise fashion. The easiest and most flexible way to do this is the following:
\begin{itemize} \item<1-> First point. \item<2-> Second point. \item<3-> Third point. \end{itemize}

The advantage of this approach is that you retain total control over the order in which items are shown. By changing, for example, the last specification to <2->, you can have the last two points uncovered at the same time. A disadvantage of the approach is that you will have to renumber everything if you add a new item. This is usually not such a big problem, but it can be a nuisance. To automatize the uncovering, you can use the following code:
\begin{itemize}[<+->] \item First point. \item Second point. \item Third point. \end{itemize}

The effect of the [<+->] is to install a default overlay specification, see the definition of itemize for details. Now, suppose you wish the second and third point to be shown at the same time. You could achieve this by adding the specification <2-> to either the second or third \item command. However, then you still have to do some renumbering if you add a new item at the beginning. A better approach is to temporarily use a different overlay specification and the dot-notation:
\begin{itemize}[<+->] \item First point. \item[<.->] Second point. \item Third point. \end{itemize}

You might wish to build your own macros based on these ideas (like an itemstep environment or a \itemlikeprevious command).

22.2

Hilighting the Current Item in an Enumeration

If you uncover an enumeration piecewise, it is sometimes a good idea to hilight the last uncovered point to draw the audience's attention to it. This is best achieved as follows:
\begin{itemize} \item<1-| alert@1> First point. \item<2-| alert@2> Second point. \item<3-| alert@3> Third point. \end{itemize}

or
\begin{itemize}[<+-| alert@+>] \item First point. \item Second point. \item Third point. \end{itemize}

Note that this will draw the little item symbol also in red.

191

22.3

Changing Symb ol Before an Enumeration
may desire that the symbol in front of the last uncovered items it is a check mark (you'll find these characters in a new action environment. If this action is activated, it the other symbol:

When uncovering a list of tasks or problems, you symbol is, say, a ballot X, while for the previous some Dingbats fonts). The best way to achieve this is to implement temporarily changes the item symbol template to

\newenvironment{ballotenv} {\only{% \setbeamertemplate{itemize item}{code for showing a ballot}% \setbeamertemplate{itemize subitem}{code for showing a smaller ballot}% \setbeamertemplate{itemize subsubitem}{code for showing a smaller ballot}}} {} \setbeamertemplate{itemize item}{code for showing a check mark} \setbeamertemplate{itemize subitem}{code for showing a smaller check mark} \setbeamertemplate{itemize subsubitem}{code for showing a smaller check mark}

The effect of the code is to install a check mark as the default template. If the action ballot is now requested for some item, this template will temporarily be replaced by the ballot templates. Note that the ballotenv is invoked with the overlay specification given for the action directly following it. This causes the \only to be invoked exactly for the specified overlays. Here are example usages:
\begin{itemize} \item<1-| ballot@1> First point. \item<2-| ballot@2> Second point. \item<3-| ballot@3> Third point. \end{itemize}

and
\begin{itemize}[<+-| ballot@+>] \item First point. \item Second point. \item Third point. \end{itemize}

In the following example, more and more items become "checked" from slide to slide:
\begin{itemize}[] \item First point. \item Second point. \item Third point. \end{itemize}

The important point is ballot@+. The funny visible@1-,+(1) has the following effect: Although it has no effect with respect to what is shown (after all, it applies to all slides), it ensures that in the enumeration the slide number 4 is mentioned. Thus there will also be a slide in which all three points are checked.

22.4

Uncovering Tagged Formulas Piecewise

Suppose you have a three-line formula as the following:
\begin{align} A &= B \\ &= C \\ &= D \end{align}

Uncovering this formula line-by-line is a little tricky. A first idea is to use the \pause or \onslide commands. Unfortunately, these do not work since align internally reprocesses its input several times,

192

which messes up the delicate internals of the commands. The next idea is the following, which works a little better:
\begin{align} A &= B \\ \uncover<2->{&= C \\} \uncover<3->{&= D} \end{align}

Unfortunately, this does not work in the presence of tags (so it works for the align* environment). What happens is that the tag of the last line is shown on all slides. The problem here is that the tag is created when \\ is encountered or when \end{align} is encountered. In the last line these are already "behind" the \uncover. To solve this problem, you can add an empty line without a tag and then insert a negative vertical skip to undo the last line:
\begin{align} A &= B \\ \uncover<2->{&= C \\} \uncover<3->{&= D \\} \notag \end{align} \vskip-1.5em

22.5

Uncovering a Table Rowwise

When you wish to uncover a table line-by-line, you will run into all sorts of problems if there are vertical and horizontal lines in the table. The reason is that the first vertical line at the left end is drawn before the line is even read (and thus, in particular, before any \onslide command can be read). However, placing a \pause or \uncover at the end of the line before is also not helpful since it will then suppress the horizontal line below the last uncovered line. A possible way to solve this problem is not to use either horizontal or vertical lines. Instead, colouring the lines using the colortbl package is a good alternative to structure the table. Here is an optically pleasing example, where the table is uncovered line-wise:
\rowcolors[]{1}{blue!20}{blue!10} \begin{tabular}{l!{\vrule}cccc} Class & A & B & C & D \\\hline X & 1 & 2 & 3 & 4 \pause\\ Y & 3 & 4 & 5 & 6 \pause\\ Z &5&6&7&8 \end{tabular}

By using \onslide instead of \pause, you can get more fine-grained control over which line is shown on which slide.

22.6

Uncovering a Table Columnwise

The same problems as for uncovering a table linewise arise for uncovering it columnwise. Once more, using the colortbl package offers a solution. In the following example, the tabular header is used to insert \onslide commands, one for each column, that cover the entries in the column from a certain slide on. At the end of the last column, the \onslide without a specification ensures that the first column on the next row is once more shown normally. Inserting a horizontal line is tricky since it will protrude over the full width of the table also in the covered version. The best idea is just not to use horizontal bars.
\rowcolors[]{1}{blue!20}{blue!10} \begin{tabular}{l!{\vrule}c<{\onslide<2->}c<{\onslide<3->}c<{\onslide<4->}c<{\onslide}c} Class & A & B & C & D \\ X & 1 & 2 & 3 & 4 \\ Y & 3 & 4 & 5 & 6 \\ Z &5&6&7&8 \end{tabular}

193

23

How To Imp ort Presentations Based on Other Packages and Classes

The beamer class comes with a number of emulation layers for classes or packages that do not support beamer directly. For example, the package beamerseminar maps some (not all) commands of the seminar class to appropriate beamer commands. This way, individual slides or whole sets of slides that have been prepared for a presentation using seminar can be used inside beamer, provided they are reasonably simple. None of the emulation layers is a perfect substitute for the original (emulations seldom are) and it is not intended that they ever will be. If you want/need/prefer the features of another class, use that class for preparing your presentations. The intension of these layers is just to help speed up creating beamer presentations that use parts of old presentations. You can simply copy these parts in verbatim, without having to worry about the subtle differences in syntax. A useful effect of using an emulation layer is that you get access to all the features of beamer while using the syntax of another class. For example, you can use the article mode to create a nice article version of a prosper talk.

23.1

Prosp er and HA-Prosp er

The package beamerprosper maps the commands of the prosper package, developed by Frґdґric Goualard, ee to beamer commands. Also, some commands of the ha-prosper package, developed by Hendri Adriaens, are mapped to beamer commands. These mappings cannot perfectly emulate al l of Prosper! Rather, these mappings are intended as an aid when porting parts of presentations created using prosper to beamer. No styles are implemented that mimick Prosper styles. Rather, the normal beamer themes must be used (although, one could implement beamer themes that mimicks existing prosper styles; I have not done that and do not intend to). The workflow for creating a beamer presentation that uses prosper code is the following: 1. Use the document class beamer, not prosper. Most options passed to prosper do not apply to beamer and should be omitted. 2. Add a \usepackage{beamerprosper} to start the emulation. 3. If you add slides relying on ha-prosper, you may wish to add the option framesassubsections to beamerprosper, though I do not recommend it (use the normal \subsection command instead; it gives you more fine-grained control). 4. If you also copy the title commands, it may be necessary to adjust the content of commands like \title or \author. Note that in prosper the \email command is given outside the \author command, whereas in beamer and also in ha-prosper it is given inside. 5. When copying slides containing the command \includegraphics, you will almost surely have to adjust A its usage. If you use pdfL TEX to typeset the presentation, than you cannot include PostScript file. You should convert them to .pdf or to .png and adjust any usage of \includegraphics accordingly. 6. When starting to change things, you can use all of beamer's commands and even mix them with prosper commands. An example can be found in the file beamerexample-prosper.tex. There are, unfortunately, quite a few places where you may run into problems: · In beamer, the command \PDForPS will do exactly what the name suggests: insert the first argument when run by pdflatex, insert the second argument when run by latex. However, in prosper, the code inserted for the pdf case is actually PostScript code, which is only later converted to pdf by some external program. You will need to adjust this PostScript code such that it works with pdflatex (which is not always possible). · If you used fine-grained spacing commands, like adding a little horizontal skip here and a big negative vertical skip there, the typesetting of the text may be poor. It may be a good idea to just remove these spacing commands. · If you use pstricks commands, you will either have to stick to using latex and dvips or will have to work around them using, for example, pgf. Porting lots of pstricks code is bound to be difficult, if you wish to switch over to pdflatex, so be warned. 194

· If the file cannot be compiled because some prosper command is not implemented, you will have to delete this command and try to mimick its behaviour using some beamer command. \usepackage{beamerprosper} Include this package in a beamer presentation to get access to prosper commands. Use beamer as the document class, not prosper. Most of the options passed to the class prosper make no sense in beamer, so just delete them. This package takes the following options: · framesassubsections causes each frame to create its own subsection with the frame title as subsection name. This behaviour mimicks ha-prosper's behaviour. In a long talk this will create way too many subsections. article The framesassubsections option has no effect in article mode. Example:
\documentclass[notes]{beamer} \usepackage[framesassubsections]{beamerprosper} \title{A Beamer Presentation Using (HA-)Prosper Commands} \subtitle{Subtitles Are Also Supported} \author{Till Tantau} \institution{The Institution is Mapped To Institute} \begin{document} \maketitle \tsectionandpart{Introduction} \overlays{2}{ \begin{slide}{About this file} \begin{itemstep} \item This is a beamer presentation. \item You can use the prosper and the HA-prosper syntax. \item This is done by mapping prosper and HA-prosper commands to beamer commands. \item The emulation is by no means perfect. \end{itemstep} \end{slide} } \section{Second Section} \subsection{A subsection} \begin{frame} \frametitle{A frame created using the \texttt{frame} environment.} \begin{itemize}[<+->] \item You can still use the original beamer syntax. \item The emulation is intended only to make recycling slides easier, not to install a whole new syntax for beamer. \end{itemize} \end{frame} \begin{notes}{Notes for these slides} My notes for these slides. \end{notes} \end{document}

195

A You can run, for example, pdfL TEX on the file to get a beamer presentation with overlays. Adding the notes option will also show the note. Certain commands, like \LeftFoot, are ignored. You can change the theme using the usual commands. You can also use all normal beamer commands and concepts, like overlay-specifications, in the file. You can also create an article version by using the class article and including the package beamerarticle.

In the following, the effect of prosper commands in beamer are listed. \email{ text } Simply typesets its argument in typewriter text. Should hence be given inside the \author command. \institution{ text } This command is mapped to beamer's \institute command if given outside the \author command, otherwise it typesets its argument in a smaller font. \Logo( x , y ){ logo text } This is mapped to \logo{ logo text }. The coordinates are ignored. \begin{slides}[ options ]{ frame title } environment contents \end{slides} Inserts a frame with the fragile=singleslide option set. The frame title will be enclosed in a \frametitle command. The following options may be given: · trans= prosper transition installs the specified prosper transition as the transition effect when showing the slide. · prosper transition has the same effect as trans= prosper transition . · toc= entry overrides the subsection table of contents entry created by this slide by entry . Note that a subsection entry is created for a slide only if the framesassubsections options is specified. · template= text is ignored. Example: The following two texts have the same effect:
\begin{slide}[trans=Glitter,toc=short]{A Title} Hi! \end{slide}

and
\subsection{short} % omitted, if framesassubsections is not specified \begin{frame}[fragile=singleslide] \transglitter \frametitle{A Title} Hi! \end{frame}

\overlays{ number }{ slide environment } This will put the slide environment into a frame that does not have the fragile option and which can hence contain overlayed text. The number is ignored since the number of necessary overlays is computed automatically by beamer. Example: The following code fragments have the same effect:
\overlays{2}{ \begin{slide}{A Title} \begin{itemstep} \item Hi! \item Ho! \end{itemstep} \end{slide}}

196

and
\subsection{A Title} % omitted, if framesassubsections is not specified \begin{frame} \frametitle{A Title} \begin{itemstep} \item Hi! \item Ho! \end{itemstep} \end{frame}

\fromSlide{ slide number }{ text } This is mapped to \uncover< slide number ->{ text }. \fromSlide*{ slide number }{ text } This is mapped to \only< slide number ->{ text }. \onlySlide{ slide number }{ text } This is mapped to \uncover< slide number >{ text }. \onlySlide*{ slide number }{ text } This is mapped to \only< slide number >{ text }. \untilSlide{ slide number }{ text } This is mapped to \uncover<- slide number >{ text }. \untilsSlide*{ slide number }{ text } This is mapped to \only<- slide number >{ text }. \FromSlide{ slide number } This is mapped to \onslide< slide number ->. \OnlySlide{ slide number } This is mapped to \onslide< slide number >. \UntilSlide{ slide number } This is mapped to \onslide<- slide number >. \slideCaption{ text } This is mapped to \date{ text }. \fontTitle{ text } Simply inserts text . \fontText{ text } Simply inserts text . \PDFtransition{ prosper transition } Maps the prosper transition to an appropriate \transxxxx command. \begin{Itemize} environment contents \end{Itemize} This is mapped to itemize. \begin{itemstep} environment contents

197

\end{itemstep} This is mapped to itemize with the option [<+->]. \begin{enumstep} environment contents \end{enumstep} This is mapped to enumerate with the option [<+->]. \hiddenitem This is mapped to \addtocounter{beamerpauses}{1}. \prosperpart[ options ]{ text } This command has the same effect as prosper's \part command. beamer's normal \part command retains its normal semantics. Thus, you might wish to replace all occurrences of \part by \prosperpart. \tsection*{ section name } Creates a section named section name . The star, if present, is ignored. \tsectionandpart*{ part text } Mapped to a \section command followed by a \prosperpart command. article In article mode, no part page is added. \dualslide[ x ][ y ][ z ]{ options }{ left column }{ right column } This command is mapped to a columns environment. The left column text is shown in the left column, the right column text is shown in the right column. The options x , y , and z are ignored. Also, all options are ignored, except for lcolwidth= and rcolwidth=. These set the width of the left or right column, respectively. \PDForPS{ PostScript text }{ PDF text } Inserts either the PostScript text or the PDF text , depending on whether latex or pdflatex is used. When porting, the PDF text will most likely be incorrect, since in prosper the PDF text is actually PostScript text that is later transformed to pdf by some external program. If the PDF text contains an \includegraphics command (which is its usual use), you should change the name of the graphic file that is included to a name ending .pdf, .png, or .jpg. Typically, you will have to convert your graphic to this format. \onlyInPDF PDF text The PDF text is only included if pdflatex is used. The same as for the command \PDForPS applies here. \onlyInPS PS text The PS text is only included if latex is used. \begin{notes}{ title } environment contents \end{notes} Mapped to \note{\textbf{ title } environment contents } (more or less). The following commands are parsed by beamer, but have no effect: · · · · · · · · · · · \myitem, \FontTitle, \FontText, \ColorFoot, \DefaultTransition, \NoFrenchBabelItemize, \TitleSlideNav, \NormalSlideNav, \HAPsetup, \LeftFoot, and \RightFoot. 198

23.2

Seminar

The package beamerseminar maps a subset of the commands of the seminar package to beamer. As for prosper, the emulation cannot be perfect. For example, no portrait slides are supported, no automatic page breaking, the framing of slides is not emulated. Unfortunately, for all frames (slide environments) that contain overlays, you have to put the environment into a frame environment "by hand" and must remove all occurrences of \newslide inside the environment by closing the slide and opening a new one (and then putting these into frame environments). The workflow for the migration is the following: 1. Use the document class beamer, not seminar. Most options passed to seminar do not apply to beamer and should be omitted. 2. If you copy parts of a presentation that is mixed with normal text, add the ignorenonframetext option and place every slide environment inside a frame since beamer will not recognize the \begin{slide} as the beginning of a frame. 3. Add a \usepackage{beamerseminar} to start the emulation. Add the option accumulate if you wish to create a presentation to be held with a video pro jector. 4. Possibly add commands to install themes and templates. 5. The should be not commands in the preamble having to do with page and slide styles. They do not apply to beamer. 6. If a \newslide command is used in a slide (or similarly slide*) environment that contains an overlay, you must replace it by a closing \end{slide} and an opening \begin{slide}. 7. Next, for each slide or slide* environment that contains an overlay, you must place a frame environment around it. You can remove the slide environment (and hence effectively replace it by frame), unless you use the accumulate option. 8. If you use \section or \subsection commands inside slides, you will have to move them outside the frames. It may then be necessary to add a \frametitle command to the slide.
A 9. If you use pdfL TEX to typeset the presentation, you cannot include PostScript files. You should convert them to .pdf or to .png and adjust any usage of \includegraphics accordingly.

10. When starting to change things, you can use all of beamer's commands and even mix them with seminar commands. An example can be found in the file beamerexample-seminar.tex. There are, unfortunately, numerous places where you may run into problems: · The whole note management of seminar is so different from beamer's, that you will have to edit notes "by hand." In particular, commands like \ifslidesonly and \ifslide may not do exactly what you expect. · If you use pstricks commands, you will either have to stick to using latex and dvips or will have to work around them using, for example, pgf. Porting lots of pstricks code is bound to be difficult, if you wish to switch over to pdflatex, so be warned. · If the file cannot be compiled because some seminar command is not implemented, you will have to delete this command and try to mimick its behaviour using some beamer command. \usepackage{beamerseminar} Include this package in a beamer presentation to get access to seminar commands. Use beamer as the document class, not seminar. Most of the options passed to the class seminar make no sense in beamer, so just delete them. This package takes the following options:

199

· accumulate causes overlays to be accumulated. The original behaviour of the seminar package is that in each overlay only the really "new" part of the overlay is shown. This makes sense, if you really print out the overlays on transparencies and then really stack overlays on top of each other. For a presentation with a video pro jector, you rather want to present an "accumulated" version of the overlays. This is what this option does: When the new material of the ith overlay is shown, the material of all previous overlays is also shown. Example: The following example is an extract of beamerexample-seminar.tex:
\documentclass[ignorenonframetext]{beamer} \usepackage[accumulated]{beamerseminar} \usepackage{beamerthemeclassic} \title{A beamer presentation using seminar commands} \author{Till Tantau} \let\heading=\frametitle \begin{document} \begin{frame} \maketitle \end{frame} This is some text outside any frame. It will only be shown in the article version. \begin{frame} \begin{slide} \heading{This is a frame title.} \begin{enumerate} {\overlay1 \item Overlays are a little tricky in seminar. {\overlay2 \item But it is possible to use them in beamer. } } \end{enumerate} \end{slide} \end{frame} \end{document}

You can use all normal beamer commands and concepts, like overlay-specifications, in the file. You can also create an article version by using the class article and including the package beamerarticle. In the following, the effect of seminar commands in beamer are listed. \overlay{ number } Shows the material till the end of the current TEX group only on overlay numbered number + 1 or, if the accumulate option is given, from that overlay on. Usages of this command may be nested (as in seminar). If an \overlay command is given inside another, it temporarily "overrules" the outer one as demonstrated in the following example, where it is assumed that the accumulate option is given. Example:
\begin{frame} \begin{slide} This is shown from the first slide on. {\overlay{2} This is shown from the third slide on. {\overlay{1} This is shown from the second slide on. } This is shown once more from the third slide on.

200

} \end{slide} \end{frame}

\begin{slide}* environment contents \end{slide} Mainly installs an \overlay{0} around the environment contents . If the accumulate option is given, this has no effect, but otherwise it will cause the main text of the slide to be shown only on the first slide. This is useful if you really wish to physically place slides on top of each other. The starred version does the same as the nonstarred one. If this command is not issued inside a \frame, it sets up a frame with the fragile=singleframe option set. Thus, this frame will contain only a single slide. Example:
\begin{slide} Some text. \end{slide} \frame{ \begin{slide} Some text. And an {\overlay{1} overlay}. \end{slide} }

\red Mapped to \color{red}. \blue Mapped to \color{blue}. \green Mapped to \color{green}. \ifslide True in the presentation modes, false in the article mode. \ifslidesonly Same as \ifslide. \ifarticle False in the presentation modes, true in the article mode. \ifportrait Always false. The following commands are parsed by beamer, but have no effect: · \ptsize.

23.3

FoilTEX

The package beamerfoils maps a subset of the commands of the foils package to beamer. Since this package defines only few non-standard TEX commands and since beamer implements all the standard commands, the emulation layer is pretty simple. A copyright notice: The FoilTEX package has a restricted license. For this reason, no example from the foils package is included in the beamer class. The emulation itself does not use the code of the foils package (rather, it just maps foils commands to beamer commands). For this reason, my understanding is that the emulation offered by the beamer class is "free" and legally so. IBM has a copyright on the foils class, not on the effect the commands of this class have. (At least, that's my understanding of things.) The workflow for the migration is the following: 201

1. Use the document class beamer, not foils. 2. Add a \usepackage{beamerfoils} to start the emulation. 3. Possibly add commands to install themes and templates. 4. If the command \foilhead is used inside a \frame command or frame environment, it behaves like \frametitle. If it used outside a frame, it will start a new frame (with the allowframebreaks option, thus no overlays are allowed). This frame will persist till the next occurrence of \foilhead or of the new command \endfoil. Note that a \frame command will not end a frame started using \foilhead. 5. If you rely on automatic frame creation based on \foilhead, you will need to insert an \endfoil before the end of the document to end the last frame.
A 6. If you use pdfL TEX to typeset the presentation, than you cannot include PostScript files. You should convert them to .pdf or to .png and adjust any usage of \includegraphics accordingly.

7. Sizes of ob jects are different in beamer, since the scaling is done by the viewer, not by the class. Thus a framebox of size 6 inches will be way too big in a beamer presentation. You will have to manually adjust explicit dimension occurring in a foilTEX presentation. \usepackage{beamerfoils} Include this package in a beamer presentation to get access to foils commands. Use beamer as the document class, not foils. Example: In the following example, frames are automatically created. The \endfoil at the end is needed to close the last frame.
\documentclass{beamer} \usepackage{beamerfoils} \begin{document} \maketitle \foilhead{First Frame} This is on the first frame. \pagebreak This is on the second frame, which is a continuation of the first. \foilhead{Third Frame} This is on the third frame. \endfoil \end{document}

Example: In this example, frames are manually inserted. No \endfoil is needed.
\documentclass{beamer} \usepackage{beamerfoils} \begin{document} \frame{\maketitle} \frame{ \foilhead{First Frame} This is on the first frame. } \frame{ \foilhead{Second Frame} This is on the second frame. } \end{document}

202

In the following, the effect of foils commands in beamer are listed. \MyLogo{ logo text } This is mapped to \logo, though the logo is internally stored, such that it can be switched on and off using \LogoOn and \LogoOff. \LogoOn Makes the logo visible. \LogoOff Makes the logo invisible. \foilhead[ dimension ]{ frame title } If used inside a \frame command or frame environment, this is mapped to \frametitle{ frame title }. If used outside any frames, a new frame is started with the option allowframebreaks. If a frame was previously started using this command, it will be closed before the next frame is started. The dimension is ignored. \rotatefoilhead[ dimension ]{ frame title } This command has exactly the same effect as \foilhead. \endfoil This is a command that is not available in foils. In beamer, it can be used to end a frame that has automatically been opened using \foildhead. This command must be given before the end of the document if the last frame was opened using \foildhead. \begin{boldequation}* environment contents \end{boldequation} This is mapped to the equation or the equation* environment, with \boldmath switched on. \FoilTeX Typesets the foilTEX name as in the foils package. \bm{ text } Implemented as in the foils package. \bmstyle{ text }{ more text } Implemented as in the foils package. The following additional theorem-like environments are predefined: · Theorem*, · Lemma*, · Corollary*, · Proposition*, · Definition*. For example, the first is defined using \newtheorem*{Theorem*}{Theorem}. The following commands are parsed by beamer, but have not effect: · \leftheader, · \rightheader, · \leftfooter, · \rightfooter, · \Restriction, and · \marginpar. 203

23.4

TEXPower

The package beamertexpower maps a subset of the commands of the texpower package, due to Stephan Lehmke, to beamer. This subset is currently rather small, so a lot of adaptions may be necessary. Note that texpower is not a full class by itself, but a package that needs another class, like seminar or prosper to do the actually typesetting. It may thus be necessary to additionally load an emulation layer for these also. Indeed, it might be possible to directly use texpower inside beamer, but I have not tried that. Perhaps this will be possible in the future. Currently, the package beamertexpower mostly just maps the \stepwise and related commands to appropriate beamer commands. The \pause command need not be mapped since it is directly implemented by beamer anyway. The workflow for the migration is the following: 1. Replace the document class by beamer. If the document class is seminar or prosper, you can use the above emulation layers, that is, you can include the files beamerseminar or beamerprosper to emulate the class. All notes on what to do for the emulation of seminar or prosper also apply here. 2. Additionally, add \usepackage{beamertexpower} to start the emulation. \usepackage{beamertexpower} Include this package in a beamer presentation to get access to the texpower commands having to do with the \stepwise command. A note on the \pause command: Both beamer and texpower implement this command and they have the same semantics; so there is no need to map this command to anything different in beamertexpower. However, a difference is that \pause can be used almost anywhere in beamer, whereas is may only be used in non-nested situations in texpower. Since beamer is only more flexible than texpower here, this will not cause problems when porting. In the following, the effect of texpower commands in beamer are listed. \stepwise{ text } As in TEXPower, this initiates text in which contained in a \step command will be enclos <+(1)->. This means that the text of the first of the second \step is inserted from the third \parstepwise{ text } Same as \stepwise, only \uncover is used instead of \only when mapping the \step command. \liststepwise{ text } Same as \stepwise, only an invisible horizontal line is inserted before the text . This is presumable useful for solving some problems related to vertical spacing in texpower. \step{ text } This is either mapped to \only<+(1)-> text or to \uncover<+(1)-> text , depending on whether this command is used inside a \stepwise environment or inside a \parstepwise environment. \steponce{ text } This is either mapped to \only<+(1)> text or to \uncover<+(1)> text , depending on whether this command is used inside a \stepwise environment or inside a \parstepwise environment. \switch{ alternate text }{ text } This is mapped to \alt<+(1)->{ text }{ alternate text }. Note that the arguments are swapped. \bstep{ text } This is always mapped to \uncover<+(1)-> text . commands like \step or \switch may be given. Text ed in an \only command with the overlay specification \step is inserted from the second slide onward, the text slide onward, and so on.

204

\dstep This just advances the counter beamerpauses by one. It has no other effect. \vstep Same as \dstep. \restep{ text } Same as \step, but the text is shown one the same slide as the previous \step command. This is implemented by first decreasing the countern beamerpauses by one before calling \step. \reswitch{ alternate text } text Like \restep, only for the \switch command. \rebstep text Like \restep, only for the \bstep command. \redstep This command has no effect. \revstep This command has no effect. \boxedsteps Temporarily (for the current TEX group) changes the effect of \step to issue an \uncover, even if used inside a \stepwise environment. \nonboxedsteps Temporarily (for the current TEX group) changes the effect of \step to issue an \only, even if used inside a \parstepwise environment. \code{ text } Typesets the argument using a boldface typewriter font. \codeswitch Switches to a boldface typewriter font.

205

Index
This index currently contains only automatically generated entries.
professional font package package, 15 10pt class option, 170 11pt class option, 170 12pt class option, 170 14pt class option, 170 17pt class option, 171 20pt class option, 171 8pt class option, 170 9pt class option, 170 abstract color/font, 110 abstract environment, 110 abstract begin template, 110 abstract end template, 110 abstract title template/color/font, 110 \action, 74 actionenv environment, 73 \addfootbox, 127 \addheadbox, 126 \addtobeamertemplate, 149 \againframe, 90 albatross color theme, 154 AlDraTex package, 12 \alert, 99 alertblock environment, 100 alerted text color/font, 99 alerted text begin template, 99 alerted text end template, 99 alertenv environment, 99 alltt package, 12 \alt, 66 altenv environment, 68 always typeset second mode beamer option, 188 amsthm package, 13 \animate, 117 \animatevalue, 118 AnnArbor presentation theme, 128 Antibes presentation theme, 130 \appendix, 86 \AtBeginLecture, 82 \AtBeginNote, 176 \AtBeginPart, 81 \AtBeginSection, 79 \AtBeginSubsection, 80 \AtBeginSubsubsection, 80 \AtEndNote, 177 \author, 77 babel package, 13 background template/color/font, 61 background canvas template/color/font, 60 Beamer colors abstract, 110 abstract title, 110 alerted text, 99 background, 61 background canvas, 60 bibliography entry author, 85 bibliography entry journal, 85 bibliography entry note, 85 bibliography entry title, 85 bibliography item, 85 block body, 100 block body alerted, 100 block body example, 101 block title, 100 block title alerted, 100 block title example, 101 button, 87 button border, 88 caption, 107 caption name, 108 description item, 97 enumerate item, 95 enumerate mini template, 96 enumerate subitem, 95 enumerate subsubitem, 96 example text, 165 footline, 51 footnote, 111 footnote mark, 112 framesubtitle, 60 frametitle, 59 frametitle continuation, 45 headline, 49 item, 97 item projected, 97 itemize item, 94 itemize subitem, 94 itemize subsubitem, 94 local structure, 98 logo, 58 lower separation line foot, 165 lower separation line head, 165 math text, 163 math text displayed, 163 math text inlined, 163 middle separation line foot, 165 middle separation line head, 165 mini frame, 54 navigation symbols, 57 normal text, 164 normal text in math text, 163 note page, 176 page number in head/foot, 52 palette primary, 164 palette quaternary, 164 palette secondary, 164 palette sidebar primary, 164 palette sidebar quaternary, 164 palette sidebar secondary, 164 palette sidebar tertiary, 164 palette tertiary, 164 part page, 81 qed symbol, 103 quotation, 111

206

quote, 111 section in head/foot, 55 section in sidebar, 55 section in sidebar shaded, 55 section in toc, 78 section in toc shaded, 78 separation line, 165 sidebar left, 52 sidebar right, 52 structure, 98 subitem, 97 subitem projected, 97 subsection in head/foot, 56 subsection in sidebar, 56 subsection in toc, 78 subsection in toc shaded, 78 subsubitem, 97 subsubitem projected, 97 subsubsection in head/foot, 56 subsubsection in sidebar, 56 subsubsection in toc, 79 subsubsection in toc shaded, 79 title page, 76 titlelike, 165 upper separation line foot, 165 upper separation line head, 165 verse, 110 Beamer elements, see Beamer templates, colors, and fonts Beamer fonts abstract, 110 abstract title, 110 alerted text, 99 background, 61 background canvas, 60 bibliography entry author, 85 bibliography entry journal, 85 bibliography entry note, 85 bibliography entry title, 85 bibliography item, 85 block body, 100 block body alerted, 100 block body example, 101 block title, 100 block title alerted, 100 block title example, 101 button, 87 caption, 107 caption name, 108 description item, 97 enumerate item, 95 enumerate mini template, 96 enumerate subitem, 95 enumerate subsubitem, 96 example text, 165 footline, 51 footnote, 111 footnote mark, 112 framesubtitle, 60 frametitle, 59 frametitle continuation, 45 headline, 49 item, 97

item projected, 97 itemize item, 94 itemize subitem, 94 itemize subsubitem, 94 logo, 58 mini frame, 54 navigation symbols, 57 normal text, 164 note page, 176 page number in head/foot, 52 part page, 81 qed symbol, 103 quotation, 111 quote, 111 section in head/foot, 55 section in sidebar, 55 section in toc, 78 section in toc shaded, 78 sidebar left, 52 sidebar right, 52 structure, 98 subitem, 97 subitem projected, 97 subsection in head/foot, 56 subsection in sidebar, 56 subsection in toc, 78 subsection in toc shaded, 78 subsubitem, 97 subsubitem projected, 97 subsubsection in head/foot, 56 subsubsection in sidebar, 56 subsubsection in toc, 79 subsubsection in toc shaded, 79 tiny structure, 98 title page, 76 titlelike, 165 verse, 110 Beamer options always typeset second mode, 188 hide notes, 177 previous slide on second screen, 188 second mode text on second screen, 187 show notes, 177 show notes on second screen, 177 show only notes, 178 Beamer templates abstract begin, 110 abstract end, 110 abstract title, 110 alerted text begin, 99 alerted text end, 99 background, 61 background canvas, 60 bibliography entry author, 85 bibliography entry journal, 85 bibliography entry note, 85 bibliography entry title, 85 bibliography item, 85 block alerted begin, 100 block alerted end, 100 block begin, 100 block end, 100 block example begin, 101

207

block example end, 101 button, 87 caption, 107 description item, 97 enumerate item, 95 enumerate mini template, 96 enumerate subitem, 95 enumerate subsubitem, 96 footline, 51 footnote, 111 frame begin, 48 frame end, 48 frametitle, 59 frametitle continuation, 45 headline, 49 itemize item, 94 itemize subitem, 94 itemize subsubitem, 94 itemize/enumerate body begin, 96 itemize/enumerate body end, 96 logo, 58 mini frame, 54 mini frame in current subsection, 54 mini frame in other subsection, 54 navigation symbols, 57 note page, 176 part page, 81 qed symbol, 103 quotation begin, 111 quotation end, 111 quote begin, 111 quote end, 111 section in head/foot, 55 section in head/foot shaded, 55 section in sidebar, 55 section in sidebar shaded, 55 section in toc, 78 section in toc shaded, 78 sidebar canvas left, 52 sidebar canvas right, 53 sidebar left, 52 sidebar right, 52 structure begin, 98 structure end, 98 subsection in head/foot, 56 subsection in head/foot shaded, 56 subsection in sidebar, 56 subsection in sidebar shaded, 56 subsection in toc, 78 subsection in toc shaded, 78 subsubsection in head/foot, 56 subsubsection in head/foot shaded, 56 subsubsection in sidebar, 56 subsubsection in sidebar shaded, 56 subsubsection in toc, 79 subsubsection in toc shaded, 79 theorem begin, 104 theorem end, 104 title page, 76 verse begin, 110 verse end, 111 beamerarticle package, 180 beamerboxesrounded environment, 107

\beamerbutton, 87 beamercolorbox environment, 105 \beamerdefaultoverlayspecification, 74 beamerfoils package, 202 \beamergotobutton, 88 beamerprosper package, 195 \beamerreturnbutton, 88 beamerseminar package, 199 \beamerskipbutton, 88 beamertexpower package, 204 beaver color theme, 157 beetle color theme, 155 Bergen presentation theme, 127 Berkeley presentation theme, 131 Berlin presentation theme, 133 \bibitem, 85 bibliography entry author template/color/font, 85 bibliography entry journal template/color/font, 85 bibliography entry note template/color/font, 85 bibliography entry title template/color/font, 85 bibliography item template/color/font, 85 bigger class option, 170 block environment, 100 block alerted begin template, 100 block alerted end template, 100 block begin template, 100 block body color/font, 100 block body alerted color/font, 100 block body example color/font, 101 block end template, 100 block example begin template, 101 block example end template, 101 block title color/font, 100 block title alerted color/font, 100 block title example color/font, 101 blocks parent template, 99 \blue, 201 \bm, 203 \bmstyle, 203 Boadilla presentation theme, 127 boldequation environment, 203 \boxedsteps, 205 boxes presentation theme, 126 \bstep, 204 button template/color/font, 87 button border color, 88 c class option, 60 CambridgeUS presentation theme, 128 caption template/color/font, 107 caption name color/font, 108 circles inner theme, 140 CJK package, 13 Class options for beamer 10pt, 170 11pt, 170 12pt, 170 14pt, 170 17pt, 171 20pt, 171 8pt, 170 9pt, 170 bigger, 170

208

c, 60 color= list of options , 13 compress, 54 draft, 30 envcountsect, 102 handout, 180 hyperref= list of options , 14 noamsthm, 103 notheorems, 103 smaller, 170 t, 60 trans, 179 ucs, 14 usepdftitle=false, 77 utf8, 14 xcolor= list of options , 15 Classes foils, 13 prosper, 15 seminar, 15 \code, 205 \codeswitch, 205 color package, 13 Color themes albatross, 154 beaver, 157 beetle, 155 crane, 155 default, 152 dolphin, 159 dove, 155 fly, 156 lily, 157 orchid, 158 rose, 158 seagull, 156 seahorse, 159 sidebartab, 153 structure, 152 whale, 159 wolverine, 157 color= list of options class option, 13 Colors, see Beamer colors colortbl package, 13 \column, 109 column environment, 109 columns environment, 108 compress class option, 54 conference-talks/conference-ornate-20min solution, 42 Copenhagen presentation theme, 136 crane color theme, 155 Darmstadt presentation theme, 135 \date, 77 default color theme, 152 default font theme, 167 default inner theme, 139 default outer theme, 141 default presentation theme, 126 \defbeamertemplate, 149 \defbeamertemplatealias, 150 \defbeamertemplateparent, 151 definition environment, 102

deluxetable package, 13 description environment, 96 description item template/color/font, 97 dolphin color theme, 159 dove color theme, 155 draft class option, 30 DraTex package, 13 Dresden presentation theme, 134 \dstep, 205 \dualslide, 198 Elements, see Beamer templates, colors, and fonts \email, 196 \endfoil, 203 enumerate environment, 94 enumerate package, 13 enumerate item template/color/font, 95 enumerate items parent template, 95 enumerate mini template template/color/font, 96 enumerate subitem template/color/font, 95 enumerate subsubitem template/color/font, 96 enumstep environment, 198 envcountsect class option, 102 Environments abstract, 110 actionenv, 73 alertblock, 100 alertenv, 99 altenv, 68 beamerboxesrounded, 107 beamercolorbox, 105 block, 100 boldequation, 203 column, 109 columns, 108 definition, 102 description, 96 enumerate, 94 enumstep, 198 example, 102 exampleblock, 101 frame, 44 Itemize, 197 itemize, 93 itemstep, 198 notes, 198 onlyenv, 68 overlayarea, 69 overprint, 69 proof, 103 quotation, 111 quote, 111 semiverbatim, 110 slide, 201 slides, 196 structureenv, 98 thebibliography, 84 theorem, 102 verse, 110 example environment, 102 example text color/font, 165 exampleblock environment, 101 \expandbeamertemplate, 148

209

fly color theme, 156 \foilhead, 203 foils class, 13 \FoilTeX, 203 Font themes default, 167 professionalfonts, 167 serif, 168 structurebold, 168 structureitalicserif, 169 structuresmallcapsserif, 169 fontenc package, 13 Fonts, see Beamer fonts \fontText, 197 \fontTitle, 197 footline template/color/font, 51 \footnote, 111 footnote template/color/font, 111 footnote mark color/font, 112 fourier package, 14 frame environment, 44 frame begin template, 48 frame end template, 48 \framesubtitle, 59 framesubtitle color/font, 60 \frametitle, 58 frametitle template/color/font, 59 frametitle continuation template/color/font, 45 \framezoom, 91 Frankfurt presentation theme, 135 \FromSlide, 197 \fromSlide, 197 generic-talks/generic-ornate-15min-45min solution, 42 Goettingen presentation theme, 132 \green, 201 HA-prosper package, 14 handout class option, 180 Hannover presentation theme, 133 headline template/color/font, 49 \hiddenitem, 198 hide notes beamer option, 177 \hyperlink, 89 \hyperlinkappendixend, 89 \hyperlinkappendixstart, 89 \hyperlinkdocumentend, 89 \hyperlinkdocumentstart, 89 \hyperlinkframeend, 89 \hyperlinkframeendprev, 89 \hyperlinkframestart, 89 \hyperlinkframestartnext, 89 \hyperlinkmovie, 117 \hyperlinkmute, 122 \hyperlinkpresentationend, 89 \hyperlinkpresentationstart, 89 \hyperlinkslidenext, 89 \hyperlinkslideprev, 89 \hyperlinksound, 122 hyperref package, 14 hyperref= list of options class option, 14 \hypertarget, 87

\ifarticle, 201 \ifbeamercolorempty, 161 \ifbeamertemplateempty, 148 \ifportrait, 201 \ifslide, 201 \ifslidesonly, 201 Ilmenau presentation theme, 134 \includeonlyframes, 30 \includeonlylecture, 82 \includeslide, 183 infolines outer theme, 142 inmargin inner theme, 141 Inner themes circles, 140 default, 139 inmargin, 141 rectangles, 140 rounded, 140 inputenc package, 14 Inserts \insertappendixendpage, 51 \insertappendixstartpage, 51 \insertauthor, 76 \insertbackfindforwardnavigationsymbol, 58 \insertbiblabel, 86 \insertblocktitle, 100 \insertbuttontext, 88 \insertcaption, 108 \insertcaptionname, 108 \insertcaptionnumber, 108 \insertcontinuationcount, 45 \insertcontinuationcountroman, 45 \insertcontinuationtext, 45 \insertdate, 76 \insertdescriptionitem, 97 \insertdocnavigationsymbol, 58 \insertdocumentendpage, 51 \insertdocumentstartpage, 51 \insertenumlabel, 95, 96 \insertfootnotemark, 112 \insertfootnotetext, 111 \insertframeendpage, 51 \insertframenavigationsymbol, 58 \insertframenumber, 51 \insertframestartpage, 51 \insertframesubtitle, 59 \insertframetitle, 59 \insertgotosymbol, 88 \insertinstitute, 76 \insertlogo, 58 \insertnavigation{ width }, 50 \insertnote, 176 \insertpagenumber, 50 \insertpart, 81 \insertpartendpage, 51 \insertpartheadnumber, 55 \insertpartnumber, 81 \insertpartromannumber, 81 \insertpartstartpage, 51 \insertpresentationendpage, 51 \insertpresentationstartpage, 51 \insertreturnsymbol, 88 \insertsection, 50

210

\insertsectionendpage, 51 \insertsectionhead, 55 \insertsectionheadnumber, 55 \insertsectionnavigation, 50 \insertsectionnavigationhorizontal, 50 \insertsectionnavigationsymbol, 58 \insertsectionstartpage, 51 \insertshortauthor, 50 \insertshortdate, 50 \insertshortinstitute, 50 \insertshortpart, 50 \insertshortsubtitle, 50 \insertshorttitle, 50 \insertskipsymbol, 88 \insertslideintonotes, 176 \insertslidenavigationsymbol, 57 \insertsubenumlabel, 95 \insertsubsection, 50 \insertsubsectionendpage, 51 \insertsubsectionhead, 56 \insertsubsectionheadnumber, 56 \insertsubsectionnavigation, 51 \insertsubsectionnavigationhorizontal, 51 \insertsubsectionnavigationsymbol, 58 \insertsubsectionstartpage, 51 \insertsubsubenumlabel, 96 \insertsubsubsection, 51 \insertsubsubsectionhead, 56 \insertsubsubsectionheadnumber, 56 \insertsubtitle, 76 \inserttheoremaddition, 104 \inserttheoremblockenv, 104 \inserttheoremheadfont, 104 \inserttheoremname, 104 \inserttheoremnumber, 104 \inserttheorempunctuation, 104 \inserttitle, 76 \inserttitlegraphic, 76 \inserttocsection, 78 \inserttocsectionnumber, 78 \inserttocsubsection, 78 \inserttocsubsectionnumber, 78 \inserttocsubsubsection, 79 \inserttocsubsubsectionnumber, 79 \inserttotalframenumber, 51 \insertverticalnavigation, 51 \institute, 77 \institution, 196 \invisible, 66 \item, 67 item color/font, 97 item projected color/font, 97 Itemize environment, 197 itemize environment, 93 itemize item template/color/font, 94 itemize items parent template, 94 itemize subitem template/color/font, 94 itemize subsubitem template/color/font, 94 itemize/enumerate body begin template, 96 itemize/enumerate body end template, 96 items parent template, 96 itemstep environment, 198 JuanLesPins presentation theme, 130

\keywords, 77 \label, 67 \lecture, 81 lily color theme, 157 listings package, 14 \liststepwise, 204 local structure color, 98 \Logo, 196 \logo, 58 logo template/color/font, 58 \LogoOff, 203 \LogoOn, 203 lower separation line foot color, 165 lower separation line head color, 165 Luebeck presentation theme, 137 Madrid presentation theme, 128 \maketitle, 76 Malmoe presentation theme, 137 Marburg presentation theme, 132 math text color, 163 math text displayed color, 163 math text inlined color, 163 middle separation line foot color, 165 middle separation line head color, 165 mini frame template/color/font, 54 mini frame in current subsection template, 54 mini frame in other subsection template, 54 mini frames parent template, 54 miniframes outer theme, 142 \mode, 184, 185 Montpellier presentation theme, 130 \movie, 115 msc package, 14 \multiinclude, 119 multimedia package, 115 musixtex package, 14 \MyLogo, 203 navigation symbols template/color/font, 57 \newcommand, 70 \newenvironment, 71 \newtheorem, 103 noamsthm class option, 103 \nonboxedsteps, 205 normal text color/font, 164 normal text in math text color, 163 \note, 175 note page template/color/font, 176 notes environment, 198 notheorems class option, 103 \only, 65 onlyenv environment, 68 \onlyInPDF, 198 \onlyInPS, 198 \OnlySlide, 197 \onlySlide, 197 \onslide, 65 \opaqueness, 166 orchid color theme, 158 Outer themes default, 141

211

infolines, 142 miniframes, 142 shadow, 145 sidebar, 143 smoothbars, 143 smoothtree, 146 split, 144 tree, 145 \overlay, 200 overlayarea environment, 69 \overlays, 196 overprint environment, 69 Packages professional font package , 15 AlDraTex, 12 alltt, 12 amsthm, 13 babel, 13 beamerarticle, 180 beamerfoils, 202 beamerprosper, 195 beamerseminar, 199 beamertexpower, 204 CJK, 13 color, 13 colortbl, 13 deluxetable, 13 DraTex, 13 enumerate, 13 fontenc, 13 fourier, 14 HA-prosper, 14 hyperref, 14 inputenc, 14 listings, 14 msc, 14 multimedia, 115 musixtex, 14 pdfpages, 14 pstricks, 15 texpower, 15 textpos, 15 ucs, 15 xcolor, 15 xmpmulti, 119 page number in head/foot color/font, 52 palette primary color, 164 palette quaternary color, 164 palette secondary color, 164 palette sidebar primary color, 164 palette sidebar quaternary color, 164 palette sidebar secondary color, 164 palette sidebar tertiary color, 164 palette tertiary color, 164 PaloAlto presentation theme, 132 \parstepwise, 204 \part, 80 part page template/color/font, 81 \partpage, 81 \pause, 63 \PDForPS, 198 pdfpages package, 14 \PDFtransition, 197

Pittsburgh presentation theme, 129 Presentation themes AnnArbor, 128 Antibes, 130 Bergen, 127 Berkeley, 131 Berlin, 133 Boadilla, 127 boxes, 126 CambridgeUS, 128 Copenhagen, 136 Darmstadt, 135 default, 126 Dresden, 134 Frankfurt, 135 Goettingen, 132 Hannover, 133 Ilmenau, 134 JuanLesPins, 130 Luebeck, 137 Madrid, 128 Malmoe, 137 Marburg, 132 Montpellier, 130 PaloAlto, 132 Pittsburgh, 129 Rochester, 129 Singapore, 136 Szeged, 136 Warsaw, 137 previous slide on second screen beamer option, 188 professionalfonts font theme, 167 proof environment, 103 prosper class, 15 \prosperpart, 198 pstricks package, 15 qed symbol template/color/font, 103 quotation color/font, 111 quotation environment, 111 quotation begin template, 111 quotation end template, 111 quote color/font, 111 quote environment, 111 quote begin template, 111 quote end template, 111 \rebstep, 205 rectangles inner theme, 140 \red, 201 \redstep, 205 \renewcommand, 71 \renewenvironment, 71 \resetcounteronoverlays, 72 \resetcountonoverlays, 72 \restep, 205 \reswitch, 205 \revstep, 205 Rochester presentation theme, 129 rose color theme, 158 \rotatefoilhead, 203 rounded inner theme, 140

212

seagull color theme, 156 seahorse color theme, 159 second mode text on second screen beamer option, 187 \section, 78 section in head/foot template/color/font, 55 section in head/foot shaded template, 55 section in sidebar template/color/font, 55 section in sidebar shaded template/color, 55 section in toc template/color/font, 78 section in toc shaded template/color/font, 78 sections/subsections in toc parent template, 83 sections/subsections in toc shaded parent template, 84 seminar class, 15 semiverbatim environment, 110 separation line color, 165 serif font theme, 168 \setbeamercolor, 162 \setbeamercovered, 166 \setbeamerfont, 172 \setbeamersize, 61 \setbeamertemplate, 148 \setjobnamebeamerversion, 182 shadow outer theme, 145 short-talks/speaker_introduction-ornate-2min solution, 42 show notes beamer option, 177 show notes on second screen beamer option, 177 show only notes beamer option, 178 sidebar outer theme, 143 sidebar canvas left template, 52 sidebar canvas right template, 53 sidebar left template/color/font, 52 sidebar right template/color/font, 52 sidebartab color theme, 153 Singapore presentation theme, 136 slide environment, 201 \slideCaption, 197 slides environment, 196 smaller class option, 170 smoothbars outer theme, 143 smoothtree outer theme, 146 Solutions conference-talks/conference-ornate-20min, 42 generic-talks/generic-ornate-15min-45min, 42 short-talks/speaker_introduction-ornate-2min, 42 \sound, 121 split outer theme, 144 \step, 204 \steponce, 204 \stepwise, 204 \structure, 98 structure color theme, 152 structure color/font, 98 structure begin template, 98 structure end template, 98 structurebold font theme, 168 structureenv environment, 98 structureitalicserif font theme, 169

structuresmallcapsserif font theme, 169 subitem color/font, 97 subitem projected color/font, 97 \subject, 77 \subsection, 78, 79 subsection in head/foot template/color/font, 56 subsection in head/foot shaded template, 56 subsection in sidebar template/color/font, 56 subsection in sidebar shaded template, 56 subsection in toc template/color/font, 78 subsection in toc shaded template/color/font, 78 subsubitem color/font, 97 subsubitem projected color/font, 97 \subsubsection, 79 subsubsection in head/foot template/color/font, 56 subsubsection in head/foot shaded template, 56 subsubsection in sidebar template/color/font, 56 subsubsection in sidebar shaded template, 56 subsubsection in toc template/color/font, 79 subsubsection in toc shaded template/color/font, 79 \subtitle, 77 \switch, 204 Szeged presentation theme, 136 t class option, 60 \tableofcontents, 82 Template inserts, see Inserts Templates, see Beamer templates \temporal, 66 texpower package, 15 textpos package, 15 thebibliography environment, 84 Themes, see Presentation themes theorem environment, 102 theorem begin template, 104 theorem end template, 104 theorems parent template, 103 tiny structure font, 98 \title, 76 title page template/color/font, 76 \titlegraphic, 77 titlelike color/font, 165 \titlepage, 76 trans class option, 179 \transblindshorizontal, 122 \transblindsvertical, 123 \transboxin, 123 \transboxout, 123 \transdissolve, 123 \transduration, 123 \transglitter, 123 \transsplithorizontalin, 123 \transsplithorizontalout, 123 \transsplitverticalin, 123 \transsplitverticalout, 123 \transwipe, 123 tree outer theme, 145 \tsection, 198 \tsectionandpart, 198 ucs class option, 14 ucs package, 15

213

\uncover, 66 \UntilSlide, 197 \untilSlide, 197 \untilsSlide, 197 upper separation line foot color, 165 upper separation line head color, 165 \usebeamercolor, 161 \usebeamerfont, 172 \usebeamertemplate, 148 \usecolortheme, 125 \usefonttheme, 125 \useinnertheme, 125 \useoutertheme, 125 usepdftitle=false class option, 77 \usetheme, 125 utf8 class option, 14 verse color/font, 110 verse environment, 110 verse begin template, 110 verse end template, 111 \visible, 66 \vstep, 205 Warsaw presentation theme, 137 whale color theme, 159 wolverine color theme, 157 xcolor package, 15 xcolor= list of options class option, 15 xmpmulti package, 119

214